blob: d4bf74ce75d7aee50d360aa2f18553f04fcfb7b3 [file] [log] [blame]
Tom Rini10e47792018-05-06 17:58:06 -04001# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002#
Wolfgang Denk1234ce72013-06-21 10:22:36 +02003# (C) Copyright 2000 - 2013
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004# Wolfgang Denk, DENX Software Engineering, wd@denx.de.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00005
6Summary:
7========
8
wdenk24ee89b2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00009This directory contains the source code for U-Boot, a boot loader for
wdenkce4832c2004-10-17 21:12:06 +000010Embedded boards based on PowerPC, ARM, MIPS and several other
11processors, which can be installed in a boot ROM and used to
12initialize and test the hardware or to download and run application
13code.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +000014
15The development of U-Boot is closely related to Linux: some parts of
wdenk24ee89b2002-11-03 17:56:27 +000016the source code originate in the Linux source tree, we have some
17header files in common, and special provision has been made to
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +000018support booting of Linux images.
19
20Some attention has been paid to make this software easily
21configurable and extendable. For instance, all monitor commands are
22implemented with the same call interface, so that it's very easy to
23add new commands. Also, instead of permanently adding rarely used
24code (for instance hardware test utilities) to the monitor, you can
25load and run it dynamically.
26
27
28Status:
29=======
30
31In general, all boards for which a configuration option exists in the
wdenk24ee89b2002-11-03 17:56:27 +000032Makefile have been tested to some extent and can be considered
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +000033"working". In fact, many of them are used in production systems.
34
Robert P. J. Day076ed9b2015-12-19 07:16:10 -050035In case of problems see the CHANGELOG file to find out who contributed
36the specific port. In addition, there are various MAINTAINERS files
37scattered throughout the U-Boot source identifying the people or
38companies responsible for various boards and subsystems.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +000039
Robert P. J. Day076ed9b2015-12-19 07:16:10 -050040Note: As of August, 2010, there is no longer a CHANGELOG file in the
41actual U-Boot source tree; however, it can be created dynamically
42from the Git log using:
Robert P. J. Day974ed2f2012-11-14 02:03:20 +000043
44 make CHANGELOG
45
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +000046
47Where to get help:
48==================
49
wdenk24ee89b2002-11-03 17:56:27 +000050In case you have questions about, problems with or contributions for
Robert P. J. Day076ed9b2015-12-19 07:16:10 -050051U-Boot, you should send a message to the U-Boot mailing list at
Peter Tyser8804a612008-09-10 09:18:34 -050052<u-boot@lists.denx.de>. There is also an archive of previous traffic
53on the mailing list - please search the archive before asking FAQ's.
54Please see http://lists.denx.de/pipermail/u-boot and
55http://dir.gmane.org/gmane.comp.boot-loaders.u-boot
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +000056
57
Wolfgang Denkb240aef2008-03-26 10:40:12 +010058Where to get source code:
59=========================
60
Robert P. J. Day076ed9b2015-12-19 07:16:10 -050061The U-Boot source code is maintained in the Git repository at
Wolfgang Denkb240aef2008-03-26 10:40:12 +010062git://www.denx.de/git/u-boot.git ; you can browse it online at
63http://www.denx.de/cgi-bin/gitweb.cgi?p=u-boot.git;a=summary
64
65The "snapshot" links on this page allow you to download tarballs of
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +020066any version you might be interested in. Official releases are also
Wolfgang Denkb240aef2008-03-26 10:40:12 +010067available for FTP download from the ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/
68directory.
69
Anatolij Gustschin08337f32008-03-26 18:13:33 +010070Pre-built (and tested) images are available from
Wolfgang Denkb240aef2008-03-26 10:40:12 +010071ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/images/
72
73
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +000074Where we come from:
75===================
76
77- start from 8xxrom sources
wdenk24ee89b2002-11-03 17:56:27 +000078- create PPCBoot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/ppcboot)
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +000079- clean up code
80- make it easier to add custom boards
81- make it possible to add other [PowerPC] CPUs
82- extend functions, especially:
83 * Provide extended interface to Linux boot loader
84 * S-Record download
85 * network boot
Simon Glassaaef3bf2019-08-01 09:47:14 -060086 * ATA disk / SCSI ... boot
wdenk24ee89b2002-11-03 17:56:27 +000087- create ARMBoot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/armboot)
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +000088- add other CPU families (starting with ARM)
wdenk24ee89b2002-11-03 17:56:27 +000089- create U-Boot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/u-boot)
Magnus Liljaf3b287b2008-08-06 19:32:33 +020090- current project page: see http://www.denx.de/wiki/U-Boot
wdenk24ee89b2002-11-03 17:56:27 +000091
92
93Names and Spelling:
94===================
95
96The "official" name of this project is "Das U-Boot". The spelling
97"U-Boot" shall be used in all written text (documentation, comments
98in source files etc.). Example:
99
100 This is the README file for the U-Boot project.
101
102File names etc. shall be based on the string "u-boot". Examples:
103
104 include/asm-ppc/u-boot.h
105
106 #include <asm/u-boot.h>
107
108Variable names, preprocessor constants etc. shall be either based on
109the string "u_boot" or on "U_BOOT". Example:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000110
wdenk24ee89b2002-11-03 17:56:27 +0000111 U_BOOT_VERSION u_boot_logo
112 IH_OS_U_BOOT u_boot_hush_start
113
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000114
wdenk7474aca2002-12-17 17:55:09 +0000115Versioning:
116===========
117
Thomas Webere89e6282010-09-28 08:06:25 +0200118Starting with the release in October 2008, the names of the releases
119were changed from numerical release numbers without deeper meaning
120into a time stamp based numbering. Regular releases are identified by
121names consisting of the calendar year and month of the release date.
122Additional fields (if present) indicate release candidates or bug fix
123releases in "stable" maintenance trees.
wdenk7474aca2002-12-17 17:55:09 +0000124
Thomas Webere89e6282010-09-28 08:06:25 +0200125Examples:
Wolfgang Denk092ae952011-10-26 10:21:21 +0000126 U-Boot v2009.11 - Release November 2009
Thomas Webere89e6282010-09-28 08:06:25 +0200127 U-Boot v2009.11.1 - Release 1 in version November 2009 stable tree
Jelle van der Waa30245ca2016-10-30 17:30:30 +0100128 U-Boot v2010.09-rc1 - Release candidate 1 for September 2010 release
wdenk7474aca2002-12-17 17:55:09 +0000129
130
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000131Directory Hierarchy:
132====================
133
Peter Tysere4d1abc2010-04-12 22:28:21 -0500134/arch Architecture specific files
Masahiro Yamadaef6ebff2014-03-07 18:02:02 +0900135 /arc Files generic to ARC architecture
Peter Tysere4d1abc2010-04-12 22:28:21 -0500136 /arm Files generic to ARM architecture
Peter Tysere4d1abc2010-04-12 22:28:21 -0500137 /m68k Files generic to m68k architecture
Peter Tysere4d1abc2010-04-12 22:28:21 -0500138 /microblaze Files generic to microblaze architecture
Peter Tysere4d1abc2010-04-12 22:28:21 -0500139 /mips Files generic to MIPS architecture
Macpaul Lin1cac36e2011-10-19 20:41:11 +0000140 /nds32 Files generic to NDS32 architecture
Peter Tysere4d1abc2010-04-12 22:28:21 -0500141 /nios2 Files generic to Altera NIOS2 architecture
Robert P. J. Daya269c932013-09-15 18:34:15 -0400142 /openrisc Files generic to OpenRISC architecture
Stefan Roese88fbf932010-04-15 16:07:28 +0200143 /powerpc Files generic to PowerPC architecture
Rick Chend7e6f922017-12-26 13:55:59 +0800144 /riscv Files generic to RISC-V architecture
Robert P. J. Day076ed9b2015-12-19 07:16:10 -0500145 /sandbox Files generic to HW-independent "sandbox"
Peter Tysere4d1abc2010-04-12 22:28:21 -0500146 /sh Files generic to SH architecture
Robert P. J. Daya269c932013-09-15 18:34:15 -0400147 /x86 Files generic to x86 architecture
Peter Tysere4d1abc2010-04-12 22:28:21 -0500148/api Machine/arch independent API for external apps
149/board Board dependent files
Xu Ziyuanfb1f9392016-08-26 19:54:49 +0800150/cmd U-Boot commands functions
Peter Tysere4d1abc2010-04-12 22:28:21 -0500151/common Misc architecture independent functions
Robert P. J. Day076ed9b2015-12-19 07:16:10 -0500152/configs Board default configuration files
Peter Tysere4d1abc2010-04-12 22:28:21 -0500153/disk Code for disk drive partition handling
154/doc Documentation (don't expect too much)
155/drivers Commonly used device drivers
Robert P. J. Daya269c932013-09-15 18:34:15 -0400156/dts Contains Makefile for building internal U-Boot fdt.
Peter Tysere4d1abc2010-04-12 22:28:21 -0500157/examples Example code for standalone applications, etc.
158/fs Filesystem code (cramfs, ext2, jffs2, etc.)
159/include Header Files
Robert P. J. Day076ed9b2015-12-19 07:16:10 -0500160/lib Library routines generic to all architectures
161/Licenses Various license files
Peter Tysere4d1abc2010-04-12 22:28:21 -0500162/net Networking code
163/post Power On Self Test
Robert P. J. Day076ed9b2015-12-19 07:16:10 -0500164/scripts Various build scripts and Makefiles
165/test Various unit test files
Peter Tysere4d1abc2010-04-12 22:28:21 -0500166/tools Tools to build S-Record or U-Boot images, etc.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000167
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000168Software Configuration:
169=======================
170
171Configuration is usually done using C preprocessor defines; the
172rationale behind that is to avoid dead code whenever possible.
173
174There are two classes of configuration variables:
175
176* Configuration _OPTIONS_:
177 These are selectable by the user and have names beginning with
178 "CONFIG_".
179
180* Configuration _SETTINGS_:
181 These depend on the hardware etc. and should not be meddled with if
182 you don't know what you're doing; they have names beginning with
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +0200183 "CONFIG_SYS_".
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000184
Robert P. J. Day076ed9b2015-12-19 07:16:10 -0500185Previously, all configuration was done by hand, which involved creating
186symbolic links and editing configuration files manually. More recently,
187U-Boot has added the Kbuild infrastructure used by the Linux kernel,
188allowing you to use the "make menuconfig" command to configure your
189build.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000190
191
192Selection of Processor Architecture and Board Type:
193---------------------------------------------------
194
195For all supported boards there are ready-to-use default
Holger Freyther7ba4e572014-08-04 09:26:05 +0200196configurations available; just type "make <board_name>_defconfig".
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000197
198Example: For a TQM823L module type:
199
200 cd u-boot
Holger Freyther7ba4e572014-08-04 09:26:05 +0200201 make TQM823L_defconfig
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000202
Robert P. J. Day076ed9b2015-12-19 07:16:10 -0500203Note: If you're looking for the default configuration file for a board
204you're sure used to be there but is now missing, check the file
205doc/README.scrapyard for a list of no longer supported boards.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000206
Simon Glass53552c92014-03-22 17:12:59 -0600207Sandbox Environment:
208--------------------
209
210U-Boot can be built natively to run on a Linux host using the 'sandbox'
211board. This allows feature development which is not board- or architecture-
212specific to be undertaken on a native platform. The sandbox is also used to
213run some of U-Boot's tests.
214
Keerthyfa002552019-07-29 13:52:04 +0530215See doc/arch/index.rst for more details.
Simon Glass53552c92014-03-22 17:12:59 -0600216
217
Simon Glassd8711af2015-03-03 08:03:00 -0700218Board Initialisation Flow:
219--------------------------
220
221This is the intended start-up flow for boards. This should apply for both
Robert P. J. Day076ed9b2015-12-19 07:16:10 -0500222SPL and U-Boot proper (i.e. they both follow the same rules).
223
224Note: "SPL" stands for "Secondary Program Loader," which is explained in
225more detail later in this file.
226
227At present, SPL mostly uses a separate code path, but the function names
228and roles of each function are the same. Some boards or architectures
229may not conform to this. At least most ARM boards which use
230CONFIG_SPL_FRAMEWORK conform to this.
Simon Glassd8711af2015-03-03 08:03:00 -0700231
Robert P. J. Day076ed9b2015-12-19 07:16:10 -0500232Execution typically starts with an architecture-specific (and possibly
233CPU-specific) start.S file, such as:
234
235 - arch/arm/cpu/armv7/start.S
236 - arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc83xx/start.S
237 - arch/mips/cpu/start.S
238
239and so on. From there, three functions are called; the purpose and
240limitations of each of these functions are described below.
Simon Glassd8711af2015-03-03 08:03:00 -0700241
242lowlevel_init():
243 - purpose: essential init to permit execution to reach board_init_f()
244 - no global_data or BSS
245 - there is no stack (ARMv7 may have one but it will soon be removed)
246 - must not set up SDRAM or use console
247 - must only do the bare minimum to allow execution to continue to
248 board_init_f()
249 - this is almost never needed
250 - return normally from this function
251
252board_init_f():
253 - purpose: set up the machine ready for running board_init_r():
254 i.e. SDRAM and serial UART
255 - global_data is available
256 - stack is in SRAM
257 - BSS is not available, so you cannot use global/static variables,
258 only stack variables and global_data
259
260 Non-SPL-specific notes:
261 - dram_init() is called to set up DRAM. If already done in SPL this
262 can do nothing
263
264 SPL-specific notes:
265 - you can override the entire board_init_f() function with your own
266 version as needed.
267 - preloader_console_init() can be called here in extremis
268 - should set up SDRAM, and anything needed to make the UART work
269 - these is no need to clear BSS, it will be done by crt0.S
Andreas Dannenberg7673bed2019-08-08 12:54:49 -0500270 - for specific scenarios on certain architectures an early BSS *can*
271 be made available (via CONFIG_SPL_EARLY_BSS by moving the clearing
272 of BSS prior to entering board_init_f()) but doing so is discouraged.
273 Instead it is strongly recommended to architect any code changes
274 or additions such to not depend on the availability of BSS during
275 board_init_f() as indicated in other sections of this README to
276 maintain compatibility and consistency across the entire code base.
Simon Glassd8711af2015-03-03 08:03:00 -0700277 - must return normally from this function (don't call board_init_r()
278 directly)
279
280Here the BSS is cleared. For SPL, if CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R is defined, then at
281this point the stack and global_data are relocated to below
282CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R_ADDR. For non-SPL, U-Boot is relocated to run at the top of
283memory.
284
285board_init_r():
286 - purpose: main execution, common code
287 - global_data is available
288 - SDRAM is available
289 - BSS is available, all static/global variables can be used
290 - execution eventually continues to main_loop()
291
292 Non-SPL-specific notes:
293 - U-Boot is relocated to the top of memory and is now running from
294 there.
295
296 SPL-specific notes:
297 - stack is optionally in SDRAM, if CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R is defined and
298 CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R_ADDR points into SDRAM
299 - preloader_console_init() can be called here - typically this is
Ley Foon Tan48fcc4a2017-05-03 17:13:32 +0800300 done by selecting CONFIG_SPL_BOARD_INIT and then supplying a
Simon Glassd8711af2015-03-03 08:03:00 -0700301 spl_board_init() function containing this call
302 - loads U-Boot or (in falcon mode) Linux
303
304
305
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000306Configuration Options:
307----------------------
308
309Configuration depends on the combination of board and CPU type; all
310such information is kept in a configuration file
311"include/configs/<board_name>.h".
312
313Example: For a TQM823L module, all configuration settings are in
314"include/configs/TQM823L.h".
315
316
wdenk1272e232002-11-10 22:06:23 +0000317Many of the options are named exactly as the corresponding Linux
318kernel configuration options. The intention is to make it easier to
319build a config tool - later.
320
Ashish Kumar11234062017-08-11 11:09:14 +0530321- ARM Platform Bus Type(CCI):
322 CoreLink Cache Coherent Interconnect (CCI) is ARM BUS which
323 provides full cache coherency between two clusters of multi-core
324 CPUs and I/O coherency for devices and I/O masters
325
326 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_HAS_CCI400
327
328 Defined For SoC that has cache coherent interconnect
329 CCN-400
wdenk1272e232002-11-10 22:06:23 +0000330
Ashish Kumar97393d62017-08-18 10:54:36 +0530331 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_HAS_CCN504
332
333 Defined for SoC that has cache coherent interconnect CCN-504
334
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000335The following options need to be configured:
336
Kim Phillips203fee32007-08-10 13:28:25 -0500337- CPU Type: Define exactly one, e.g. CONFIG_MPC85XX.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000338
Kim Phillips203fee32007-08-10 13:28:25 -0500339- Board Type: Define exactly one, e.g. CONFIG_MPC8540ADS.
Wolfgang Denk994ad962006-10-24 14:42:37 +0200340
Kumar Galaf4fb90f2011-02-18 05:40:54 -0600341- 85xx CPU Options:
York Sun2394a0f2012-10-08 07:44:30 +0000342 CONFIG_SYS_PPC64
343
344 Specifies that the core is a 64-bit PowerPC implementation (implements
345 the "64" category of the Power ISA). This is necessary for ePAPR
346 compliance, among other possible reasons.
347
Kumar Galaf4fb90f2011-02-18 05:40:54 -0600348 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_TBCLK_DIV
349
350 Defines the core time base clock divider ratio compared to the
351 system clock. On most PQ3 devices this is 8, on newer QorIQ
352 devices it can be 16 or 32. The ratio varies from SoC to Soc.
353
Kumar Gala179b1b22011-05-20 00:39:21 -0500354 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PCIE_COMPAT
355
356 Defines the string to utilize when trying to match PCIe device
357 tree nodes for the given platform.
358
Scott Wood80806962012-08-14 10:14:53 +0000359 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510
360
361 Enables a workaround for erratum A004510. If set,
362 then CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV and
363 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_CORENET_SNOOPVEC_COREONLY must be set.
364
365 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV
366 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV2 (optional)
367
368 Defines one or two SoC revisions (low 8 bits of SVR)
369 for which the A004510 workaround should be applied.
370
371 The rest of SVR is either not relevant to the decision
372 of whether the erratum is present (e.g. p2040 versus
373 p2041) or is implied by the build target, which controls
374 whether CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510 is set.
375
376 See Freescale App Note 4493 for more information about
377 this erratum.
378
Prabhakar Kushwahad324f472013-04-16 13:27:44 +0530379 CONFIG_A003399_NOR_WORKAROUND
380 Enables a workaround for IFC erratum A003399. It is only
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -0800381 required during NOR boot.
Prabhakar Kushwahad324f472013-04-16 13:27:44 +0530382
Prabhakar Kushwahac4c10d12014-10-29 22:33:09 +0530383 CONFIG_A008044_WORKAROUND
384 Enables a workaround for T1040/T1042 erratum A008044. It is only
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -0800385 required during NAND boot and valid for Rev 1.0 SoC revision
Prabhakar Kushwahac4c10d12014-10-29 22:33:09 +0530386
Scott Wood80806962012-08-14 10:14:53 +0000387 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_CORENET_SNOOPVEC_COREONLY
388
389 This is the value to write into CCSR offset 0x18600
390 according to the A004510 workaround.
391
Priyanka Jainc73b9032013-07-02 09:21:04 +0530392 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_DDR_ADDR
393 This value denotes start offset of DDR memory which is
394 connected exclusively to the DSP cores.
395
Priyanka Jainf81e8b22013-04-04 09:31:54 +0530396 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_M2_RAM_ADDR
397 This value denotes start offset of M2 memory
398 which is directly connected to the DSP core.
399
Priyanka Jainc73b9032013-07-02 09:21:04 +0530400 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_M3_RAM_ADDR
401 This value denotes start offset of M3 memory which is directly
402 connected to the DSP core.
403
Priyanka Jainf81e8b22013-04-04 09:31:54 +0530404 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT
405 This value denotes start offset of DSP CCSR space.
406
Priyanka Jaine9dcaa82013-12-17 14:25:52 +0530407 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SINGLE_SOURCE_CLK
408 Single Source Clock is clocking mode present in some of FSL SoC's.
409 In this mode, a single differential clock is used to supply
410 clocks to the sysclock, ddrclock and usbclock.
411
Aneesh Bansal8bcbc272014-03-18 23:40:26 +0530412 CONFIG_SYS_CPC_REINIT_F
413 This CONFIG is defined when the CPC is configured as SRAM at the
Bin Meng75574052016-02-05 19:30:11 -0800414 time of U-Boot entry and is required to be re-initialized.
Aneesh Bansal8bcbc272014-03-18 23:40:26 +0530415
Tang Yuantiana7364af2014-04-17 15:33:46 +0800416 CONFIG_DEEP_SLEEP
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -0800417 Indicates this SoC supports deep sleep feature. If deep sleep is
Tang Yuantiana7364af2014-04-17 15:33:46 +0800418 supported, core will start to execute uboot when wakes up.
419
Daniel Schwierzeckd8a49ca2012-04-02 02:57:56 +0000420- Generic CPU options:
421 CONFIG_SYS_BIG_ENDIAN, CONFIG_SYS_LITTLE_ENDIAN
422
423 Defines the endianess of the CPU. Implementation of those
424 values is arch specific.
425
York Sunf0626592013-09-30 09:22:09 -0700426 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR
427 Freescale DDR driver in use. This type of DDR controller is
428 found in mpc83xx, mpc85xx, mpc86xx as well as some ARM core
429 SoCs.
430
431 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_ADDR
432 Freescale DDR memory-mapped register base.
433
434 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_EMU
435 Specify emulator support for DDR. Some DDR features such as
436 deskew training are not available.
437
438 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN1
439 Freescale DDR1 controller.
440
441 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN2
442 Freescale DDR2 controller.
443
444 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN3
445 Freescale DDR3 controller.
446
York Sun2896cb72014-03-27 17:54:47 -0700447 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN4
448 Freescale DDR4 controller.
449
York Sun461c9392013-09-30 14:20:51 -0700450 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_ARM_GEN3
451 Freescale DDR3 controller for ARM-based SoCs.
452
York Sunf0626592013-09-30 09:22:09 -0700453 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR1
454 Board config to use DDR1. It can be enabled for SoCs with
455 Freescale DDR1 or DDR2 controllers, depending on the board
456 implemetation.
457
458 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR2
Robert P. J. Day8d56db92016-07-15 13:44:45 -0400459 Board config to use DDR2. It can be enabled for SoCs with
York Sunf0626592013-09-30 09:22:09 -0700460 Freescale DDR2 or DDR3 controllers, depending on the board
461 implementation.
462
463 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR3
464 Board config to use DDR3. It can be enabled for SoCs with
York Sun2896cb72014-03-27 17:54:47 -0700465 Freescale DDR3 or DDR3L controllers.
466
467 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR3L
468 Board config to use DDR3L. It can be enabled for SoCs with
469 DDR3L controllers.
470
471 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR4
472 Board config to use DDR4. It can be enabled for SoCs with
473 DDR4 controllers.
York Sunf0626592013-09-30 09:22:09 -0700474
Prabhakar Kushwaha62908c22014-01-18 12:28:30 +0530475 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_BE
476 Defines the IFC controller register space as Big Endian
477
478 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_LE
479 Defines the IFC controller register space as Little Endian
480
Prabhakar Kushwaha3c48f582017-02-02 15:01:26 +0530481 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_CLK_DIV
482 Defines divider of platform clock(clock input to IFC controller).
483
Prabhakar Kushwahabedc5622017-02-02 15:02:00 +0530484 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_LBC_CLK_DIV
485 Defines divider of platform clock(clock input to eLBC controller).
486
Prabhakar Kushwaha950f2f72014-01-13 11:28:04 +0530487 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PBL_PBI
488 It enables addition of RCW (Power on reset configuration) in built image.
489 Please refer doc/README.pblimage for more details
490
491 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PBL_RCW
492 It adds PBI(pre-boot instructions) commands in u-boot build image.
493 PBI commands can be used to configure SoC before it starts the execution.
494 Please refer doc/README.pblimage for more details
495
York Sun29647ab2014-02-10 13:59:42 -0800496 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_BE
497 Defines the DDR controller register space as Big Endian
498
499 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_LE
500 Defines the DDR controller register space as Little Endian
501
York Sun3a0916d2014-02-10 13:59:43 -0800502 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_SDRAM_BASE_PHY
503 Physical address from the view of DDR controllers. It is the
504 same as CONFIG_SYS_DDR_SDRAM_BASE for all Power SoCs. But
505 it could be different for ARM SoCs.
506
York Sunc459ae62014-02-10 13:59:44 -0800507 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_INTLV_256B
508 DDR controller interleaving on 256-byte. This is a special
509 interleaving mode, handled by Dickens for Freescale layerscape
510 SoCs with ARM core.
511
York Sun79a779b2014-08-01 15:51:00 -0700512 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_MAIN_NUM_CTRLS
513 Number of controllers used as main memory.
514
515 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_OTHER_DDR_NUM_CTRLS
516 Number of controllers used for other than main memory.
517
Prabhakar Kushwaha122bcfd2015-11-09 16:42:07 +0530518 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_HAS_DP_DDR
519 Defines the SoC has DP-DDR used for DPAA.
520
Ruchika Guptabb7143b2014-09-09 11:50:31 +0530521 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SEC_BE
522 Defines the SEC controller register space as Big Endian
523
524 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SEC_LE
525 Defines the SEC controller register space as Little Endian
526
Daniel Schwierzeckd52a6232011-07-27 13:22:39 +0200527- MIPS CPU options:
528 CONFIG_SYS_INIT_SP_OFFSET
529
530 Offset relative to CONFIG_SYS_SDRAM_BASE for initial stack
531 pointer. This is needed for the temporary stack before
532 relocation.
533
Daniel Schwierzeckd52a6232011-07-27 13:22:39 +0200534 CONFIG_XWAY_SWAP_BYTES
535
536 Enable compilation of tools/xway-swap-bytes needed for Lantiq
537 XWAY SoCs for booting from NOR flash. The U-Boot image needs to
538 be swapped if a flash programmer is used.
539
Christian Riesch48c2d6d2012-02-02 00:44:39 +0000540- ARM options:
541 CONFIG_SYS_EXCEPTION_VECTORS_HIGH
542
543 Select high exception vectors of the ARM core, e.g., do not
544 clear the V bit of the c1 register of CP15.
545
York Sun77a10972015-03-20 19:28:08 -0700546 COUNTER_FREQUENCY
547 Generic timer clock source frequency.
548
549 COUNTER_FREQUENCY_REAL
550 Generic timer clock source frequency if the real clock is
551 different from COUNTER_FREQUENCY, and can only be determined
552 at run time.
553
Stephen Warren8d1fb312015-01-19 16:25:52 -0700554- Tegra SoC options:
555 CONFIG_TEGRA_SUPPORT_NON_SECURE
556
557 Support executing U-Boot in non-secure (NS) mode. Certain
558 impossible actions will be skipped if the CPU is in NS mode,
559 such as ARM architectural timer initialization.
560
wdenk9b7f3842003-10-09 20:09:04 +0000561- Linux Kernel Interface:
wdenk9b7f3842003-10-09 20:09:04 +0000562 CONFIG_MEMSIZE_IN_BYTES [relevant for MIPS only]
563
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -0800564 When transferring memsize parameter to Linux, some versions
wdenk9b7f3842003-10-09 20:09:04 +0000565 expect it to be in bytes, others in MB.
566 Define CONFIG_MEMSIZE_IN_BYTES to make it in bytes.
567
Gerald Van Barenfcd91bb2008-06-03 20:34:45 -0400568 CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT
Wolfgang Denk27a5b0b2005-10-13 01:45:54 +0200569
570 New kernel versions are expecting firmware settings to be
Gerald Van Barend6abef42007-03-31 12:23:51 -0400571 passed using flattened device trees (based on open firmware
572 concepts).
573
574 CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT
575 * New libfdt-based support
576 * Adds the "fdt" command
Kim Phillips9b46eb62007-08-10 14:34:14 -0500577 * The bootm command automatically updates the fdt
Gerald Van Barend6abef42007-03-31 12:23:51 -0400578
Wolfgang Denk27a5b0b2005-10-13 01:45:54 +0200579 OF_TBCLK - The timebase frequency.
Kumar Galae40c2b52006-01-11 13:59:02 -0600580 OF_STDOUT_PATH - The path to the console device
Wolfgang Denk27a5b0b2005-10-13 01:45:54 +0200581
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +0200582 boards with QUICC Engines require OF_QE to set UCC MAC
583 addresses
Kim Phillips9b46eb62007-08-10 14:34:14 -0500584
Kumar Gala1e26aa52006-01-11 13:54:17 -0600585 CONFIG_OF_BOARD_SETUP
586
587 Board code has addition modification that it wants to make
588 to the flat device tree before handing it off to the kernel
wdenkda04a8b2004-08-02 23:22:59 +0000589
Simon Glass6c0be912014-10-23 18:58:54 -0600590 CONFIG_OF_SYSTEM_SETUP
591
592 Other code has addition modification that it wants to make
593 to the flat device tree before handing it off to the kernel.
594 This causes ft_system_setup() to be called before booting
595 the kernel.
596
Heiko Schocherffb293a2009-09-23 07:56:08 +0200597 CONFIG_OF_IDE_FIXUP
598
599 U-Boot can detect if an IDE device is present or not.
600 If not, and this new config option is activated, U-Boot
601 removes the ATA node from the DTS before booting Linux,
602 so the Linux IDE driver does not probe the device and
603 crash. This is needed for buggy hardware (uc101) where
604 no pull down resistor is connected to the signal IDE5V_DD7.
605
Igor Grinberg06890672011-07-14 05:45:07 +0000606 CONFIG_MACH_TYPE [relevant for ARM only][mandatory]
607
608 This setting is mandatory for all boards that have only one
609 machine type and must be used to specify the machine type
610 number as it appears in the ARM machine registry
611 (see http://www.arm.linux.org.uk/developer/machines/).
612 Only boards that have multiple machine types supported
613 in a single configuration file and the machine type is
614 runtime discoverable, do not have to use this setting.
615
Niklaus Giger0ab978d2008-11-03 22:13:47 +0100616- vxWorks boot parameters:
617
618 bootvx constructs a valid bootline using the following
Bin Mengfb694b92015-10-07 20:19:17 -0700619 environments variables: bootdev, bootfile, ipaddr, netmask,
620 serverip, gatewayip, hostname, othbootargs.
Niklaus Giger0ab978d2008-11-03 22:13:47 +0100621 It loads the vxWorks image pointed bootfile.
622
Niklaus Giger0ab978d2008-11-03 22:13:47 +0100623 Note: If a "bootargs" environment is defined, it will overwride
624 the defaults discussed just above.
625
Aneesh V960f5c02011-06-16 23:30:47 +0000626- Cache Configuration:
Aneesh V960f5c02011-06-16 23:30:47 +0000627 CONFIG_SYS_L2CACHE_OFF- Do not enable L2 cache in U-Boot
628
Aneesh V686a0752011-06-16 23:30:51 +0000629- Cache Configuration for ARM:
630 CONFIG_SYS_L2_PL310 - Enable support for ARM PL310 L2 cache
631 controller
632 CONFIG_SYS_PL310_BASE - Physical base address of PL310
633 controller register space
634
wdenkda04a8b2004-08-02 23:22:59 +0000635- Serial Ports:
Andreas Engel0813b122008-09-08 14:30:53 +0200636 CONFIG_PL010_SERIAL
wdenkda04a8b2004-08-02 23:22:59 +0000637
638 Define this if you want support for Amba PrimeCell PL010 UARTs.
639
Andreas Engel0813b122008-09-08 14:30:53 +0200640 CONFIG_PL011_SERIAL
wdenkda04a8b2004-08-02 23:22:59 +0000641
642 Define this if you want support for Amba PrimeCell PL011 UARTs.
643
644 CONFIG_PL011_CLOCK
645
646 If you have Amba PrimeCell PL011 UARTs, set this variable to
647 the clock speed of the UARTs.
648
649 CONFIG_PL01x_PORTS
650
651 If you have Amba PrimeCell PL010 or PL011 UARTs on your board,
652 define this to a list of base addresses for each (supported)
653 port. See e.g. include/configs/versatile.h
654
Karicheri, Muralidharancbc08882014-04-09 15:38:46 -0400655 CONFIG_SERIAL_HW_FLOW_CONTROL
656
657 Define this variable to enable hw flow control in serial driver.
658 Current user of this option is drivers/serial/nsl16550.c driver
wdenkda04a8b2004-08-02 23:22:59 +0000659
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000660- Autoboot Command:
661 CONFIG_BOOTCOMMAND
662 Only needed when CONFIG_BOOTDELAY is enabled;
663 define a command string that is automatically executed
664 when no character is read on the console interface
665 within "Boot Delay" after reset.
666
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000667 CONFIG_RAMBOOT and CONFIG_NFSBOOT
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +0000668 The value of these goes into the environment as
669 "ramboot" and "nfsboot" respectively, and can be used
670 as a convenience, when switching between booting from
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +0200671 RAM and NFS.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000672
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000673- Serial Download Echo Mode:
674 CONFIG_LOADS_ECHO
675 If defined to 1, all characters received during a
676 serial download (using the "loads" command) are
677 echoed back. This might be needed by some terminal
678 emulations (like "cu"), but may as well just take
679 time on others. This setting #define's the initial
680 value of the "loads_echo" environment variable.
681
Jon Loeligerc1da5c92007-06-11 19:03:39 -0500682- Kgdb Serial Baudrate: (if CONFIG_CMD_KGDB is defined)
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000683 CONFIG_KGDB_BAUDRATE
684 Select one of the baudrates listed in
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +0200685 CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE, see below.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000686
Simon Glassaa34ef22016-03-13 19:07:28 -0600687- Removal of commands
688 If no commands are needed to boot, you can disable
689 CONFIG_CMDLINE to remove them. In this case, the command line
690 will not be available, and when U-Boot wants to execute the
691 boot command (on start-up) it will call board_run_command()
692 instead. This can reduce image size significantly for very
693 simple boot procedures.
694
Wolfgang Denk2aceea12013-03-23 23:50:31 +0000695- Regular expression support:
696 CONFIG_REGEX
Wolfgang Denkec7fbf52013-10-04 17:43:24 +0200697 If this variable is defined, U-Boot is linked against
698 the SLRE (Super Light Regular Expression) library,
699 which adds regex support to some commands, as for
700 example "env grep" and "setexpr".
Wolfgang Denk2aceea12013-03-23 23:50:31 +0000701
Simon Glass3d686442011-10-15 05:48:20 +0000702- Device tree:
703 CONFIG_OF_CONTROL
704 If this variable is defined, U-Boot will use a device tree
705 to configure its devices, instead of relying on statically
706 compiled #defines in the board file. This option is
707 experimental and only available on a few boards. The device
708 tree is available in the global data as gd->fdt_blob.
709
Simon Glass5cb34db2011-10-24 19:15:31 +0000710 U-Boot needs to get its device tree from somewhere. This can
Alex Deymo5b661ec2017-04-02 01:25:20 -0700711 be done using one of the three options below:
Simon Glass38d6b8d2011-10-15 05:48:21 +0000712
713 CONFIG_OF_EMBED
714 If this variable is defined, U-Boot will embed a device tree
715 binary in its image. This device tree file should be in the
716 board directory and called <soc>-<board>.dts. The binary file
717 is then picked up in board_init_f() and made available through
Nobuhiro Iwamatsu1f17f192017-08-26 07:34:14 +0900718 the global data structure as gd->fdt_blob.
Simon Glass3d686442011-10-15 05:48:20 +0000719
Simon Glass5cb34db2011-10-24 19:15:31 +0000720 CONFIG_OF_SEPARATE
721 If this variable is defined, U-Boot will build a device tree
722 binary. It will be called u-boot.dtb. Architecture-specific
723 code will locate it at run-time. Generally this works by:
724
725 cat u-boot.bin u-boot.dtb >image.bin
726
727 and in fact, U-Boot does this for you, creating a file called
728 u-boot-dtb.bin which is useful in the common case. You can
729 still use the individual files if you need something more
730 exotic.
731
Alex Deymo5b661ec2017-04-02 01:25:20 -0700732 CONFIG_OF_BOARD
733 If this variable is defined, U-Boot will use the device tree
734 provided by the board at runtime instead of embedding one with
735 the image. Only boards defining board_fdt_blob_setup() support
736 this option (see include/fdtdec.h file).
737
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000738- Watchdog:
739 CONFIG_WATCHDOG
740 If this variable is defined, it enables watchdog
Detlev Zundel6aa4d7b2011-04-27 05:25:59 +0000741 support for the SoC. There must be support in the SoC
Christophe Leroy069fa832017-07-06 10:23:22 +0200742 specific code for a watchdog. For the 8xx
743 CPUs, the SIU Watchdog feature is enabled in the SYPCR
744 register. When supported for a specific SoC is
745 available, then no further board specific code should
746 be needed to use it.
Detlev Zundel6aa4d7b2011-04-27 05:25:59 +0000747
748 CONFIG_HW_WATCHDOG
749 When using a watchdog circuitry external to the used
750 SoC, then define this variable and provide board
751 specific code for the "hw_watchdog_reset" function.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000752
753- Real-Time Clock:
754
Jon Loeligerc1da5c92007-06-11 19:03:39 -0500755 When CONFIG_CMD_DATE is selected, the type of the RTC
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000756 has to be selected, too. Define exactly one of the
757 following options:
758
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000759 CONFIG_RTC_PCF8563 - use Philips PCF8563 RTC
Fabio Estevam3f8d1782011-10-24 06:44:15 +0000760 CONFIG_RTC_MC13XXX - use MC13783 or MC13892 RTC
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000761 CONFIG_RTC_MC146818 - use MC146818 RTC
wdenk1fe2c702003-03-06 21:55:29 +0000762 CONFIG_RTC_DS1307 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1307 RTC
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000763 CONFIG_RTC_DS1337 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1337 RTC
wdenk0893c472003-05-20 14:25:27 +0000764 CONFIG_RTC_DS1338 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1338 RTC
Markus Niebel90491f22014-07-21 11:06:16 +0200765 CONFIG_RTC_DS1339 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1339 RTC
wdenkef5fe752003-03-12 10:41:04 +0000766 CONFIG_RTC_DS164x - use Dallas DS164x RTC
Tor Krillb27939b2008-03-15 15:40:26 +0100767 CONFIG_RTC_ISL1208 - use Intersil ISL1208 RTC
wdenkaeba06f2004-06-09 17:34:58 +0000768 CONFIG_RTC_MAX6900 - use Maxim, Inc. MAX6900 RTC
Chris Packham2d3ac512017-05-30 12:03:33 +1200769 CONFIG_RTC_DS1337_NOOSC - Turn off the OSC output for DS1337
Heiko Schocher1f1b7012011-03-28 09:24:22 +0200770 CONFIG_SYS_RV3029_TCR - enable trickle charger on
771 RV3029 RTC.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000772
wdenkb9bbd242003-06-30 16:24:52 +0000773 Note that if the RTC uses I2C, then the I2C interface
774 must also be configured. See I2C Support, below.
775
Peter Tyser9902e422008-12-17 16:36:21 -0600776- GPIO Support:
777 CONFIG_PCA953X - use NXP's PCA953X series I2C GPIO
Peter Tyser9902e422008-12-17 16:36:21 -0600778
Chris Packham9b383202010-12-19 10:12:13 +0000779 The CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PCA953X_WIDTH option specifies a list of
780 chip-ngpio pairs that tell the PCA953X driver the number of
781 pins supported by a particular chip.
782
Peter Tyser9902e422008-12-17 16:36:21 -0600783 Note that if the GPIO device uses I2C, then the I2C interface
784 must also be configured. See I2C Support, below.
785
Simon Glass4dc47ca2014-06-11 23:29:41 -0600786- I/O tracing:
787 When CONFIG_IO_TRACE is selected, U-Boot intercepts all I/O
788 accesses and can checksum them or write a list of them out
789 to memory. See the 'iotrace' command for details. This is
790 useful for testing device drivers since it can confirm that
791 the driver behaves the same way before and after a code
792 change. Currently this is supported on sandbox and arm. To
793 add support for your architecture, add '#include <iotrace.h>'
794 to the bottom of arch/<arch>/include/asm/io.h and test.
795
796 Example output from the 'iotrace stats' command is below.
797 Note that if the trace buffer is exhausted, the checksum will
798 still continue to operate.
799
800 iotrace is enabled
801 Start: 10000000 (buffer start address)
802 Size: 00010000 (buffer size)
803 Offset: 00000120 (current buffer offset)
804 Output: 10000120 (start + offset)
805 Count: 00000018 (number of trace records)
806 CRC32: 9526fb66 (CRC32 of all trace records)
807
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000808- Timestamp Support:
809
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +0000810 When CONFIG_TIMESTAMP is selected, the timestamp
811 (date and time) of an image is printed by image
812 commands like bootm or iminfo. This option is
Jon Loeligerc1da5c92007-06-11 19:03:39 -0500813 automatically enabled when you select CONFIG_CMD_DATE .
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000814
Karl O. Pinc8b1f90a2012-08-16 06:20:15 +0000815- Partition Labels (disklabels) Supported:
816 Zero or more of the following:
817 CONFIG_MAC_PARTITION Apple's MacOS partition table.
Karl O. Pinc8b1f90a2012-08-16 06:20:15 +0000818 CONFIG_ISO_PARTITION ISO partition table, used on CDROM etc.
819 CONFIG_EFI_PARTITION GPT partition table, common when EFI is the
820 bootloader. Note 2TB partition limit; see
821 disk/part_efi.c
Simon Glass8706b812016-05-01 11:36:02 -0600822 CONFIG_SCSI) you must configure support for at
Karl O. Pinc8b1f90a2012-08-16 06:20:15 +0000823 least one non-MTD partition type as well.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000824
825- IDE Reset method:
wdenk369d43d2004-03-14 14:09:05 +0000826 CONFIG_IDE_RESET_ROUTINE - this is defined in several
827 board configurations files but used nowhere!
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000828
wdenk369d43d2004-03-14 14:09:05 +0000829 CONFIG_IDE_RESET - is this is defined, IDE Reset will
830 be performed by calling the function
831 ide_set_reset(int reset)
832 which has to be defined in a board specific file
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000833
834- ATAPI Support:
835 CONFIG_ATAPI
836
837 Set this to enable ATAPI support.
838
wdenkf602aa02004-03-13 23:29:43 +0000839- LBA48 Support
840 CONFIG_LBA48
841
842 Set this to enable support for disks larger than 137GB
Heiko Schocher0f602e12009-12-03 11:21:21 +0100843 Also look at CONFIG_SYS_64BIT_LBA.
wdenkf602aa02004-03-13 23:29:43 +0000844 Whithout these , LBA48 support uses 32bit variables and will 'only'
845 support disks up to 2.1TB.
846
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +0200847 CONFIG_SYS_64BIT_LBA:
wdenkf602aa02004-03-13 23:29:43 +0000848 When enabled, makes the IDE subsystem use 64bit sector addresses.
849 Default is 32bit.
850
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000851- SCSI Support:
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +0200852 CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_LUN [8], CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_SCSI_ID [7] and
853 CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_DEVICE [CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_SCSI_ID *
854 CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_LUN] can be adjusted to define the
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000855 maximum numbers of LUNs, SCSI ID's and target
856 devices.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000857
Wolfgang Denkec7fbf52013-10-04 17:43:24 +0200858 The environment variable 'scsidevs' is set to the number of
859 SCSI devices found during the last scan.
Stefan Reinauere50a10e2012-10-29 05:23:48 +0000860
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000861- NETWORK Support (PCI):
wdenk4e112c12003-06-03 23:54:09 +0000862 CONFIG_E1000
Kyle Moffett64b94dd2011-10-18 11:05:29 +0000863 Support for Intel 8254x/8257x gigabit chips.
864
865 CONFIG_E1000_SPI
866 Utility code for direct access to the SPI bus on Intel 8257x.
867 This does not do anything useful unless you set at least one
868 of CONFIG_CMD_E1000 or CONFIG_E1000_SPI_GENERIC.
869
870 CONFIG_E1000_SPI_GENERIC
871 Allow generic access to the SPI bus on the Intel 8257x, for
872 example with the "sspi" command.
873
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000874 CONFIG_NATSEMI
875 Support for National dp83815 chips.
876
877 CONFIG_NS8382X
878 Support for National dp8382[01] gigabit chips.
879
wdenkaa603362003-05-12 21:50:16 +0000880- NETWORK Support (other):
881
Jens Scharsigdab7cb82010-01-23 12:03:45 +0100882 CONFIG_DRIVER_AT91EMAC
883 Support for AT91RM9200 EMAC.
884
885 CONFIG_RMII
886 Define this to use reduced MII inteface
887
888 CONFIG_DRIVER_AT91EMAC_QUIET
889 If this defined, the driver is quiet.
890 The driver doen't show link status messages.
891
Rob Herringc9830dc2011-12-15 11:15:49 +0000892 CONFIG_CALXEDA_XGMAC
893 Support for the Calxeda XGMAC device
894
Ashok93fb8722012-10-15 06:20:47 +0000895 CONFIG_LAN91C96
wdenkaa603362003-05-12 21:50:16 +0000896 Support for SMSC's LAN91C96 chips.
897
wdenkaa603362003-05-12 21:50:16 +0000898 CONFIG_LAN91C96_USE_32_BIT
899 Define this to enable 32 bit addressing
900
Ashok93fb8722012-10-15 06:20:47 +0000901 CONFIG_SMC91111
wdenk3c711762004-06-09 13:37:52 +0000902 Support for SMSC's LAN91C111 chip
903
904 CONFIG_SMC91111_BASE
905 Define this to hold the physical address
906 of the device (I/O space)
907
908 CONFIG_SMC_USE_32_BIT
909 Define this if data bus is 32 bits
910
911 CONFIG_SMC_USE_IOFUNCS
912 Define this to use i/o functions instead of macros
913 (some hardware wont work with macros)
914
Heiko Schocher7d037f72011-11-15 10:00:04 -0500915 CONFIG_SYS_DAVINCI_EMAC_PHY_COUNT
916 Define this if you have more then 3 PHYs.
917
Macpaul Lin199c6252010-12-21 16:59:46 +0800918 CONFIG_FTGMAC100
919 Support for Faraday's FTGMAC100 Gigabit SoC Ethernet
920
921 CONFIG_FTGMAC100_EGIGA
922 Define this to use GE link update with gigabit PHY.
923 Define this if FTGMAC100 is connected to gigabit PHY.
924 If your system has 10/100 PHY only, it might not occur
925 wrong behavior. Because PHY usually return timeout or
926 useless data when polling gigabit status and gigabit
927 control registers. This behavior won't affect the
928 correctnessof 10/100 link speed update.
929
Yoshihiro Shimodaed4cea02011-01-27 10:06:03 +0900930 CONFIG_SH_ETHER
931 Support for Renesas on-chip Ethernet controller
932
933 CONFIG_SH_ETHER_USE_PORT
934 Define the number of ports to be used
935
936 CONFIG_SH_ETHER_PHY_ADDR
937 Define the ETH PHY's address
938
Yoshihiro Shimoda281aa052011-01-27 10:06:08 +0900939 CONFIG_SH_ETHER_CACHE_WRITEBACK
940 If this option is set, the driver enables cache flush.
941
Vadim Bendeburydac69642011-10-17 08:36:14 +0000942- TPM Support:
Che-liang Chiouacea5702013-04-12 11:04:34 +0000943 CONFIG_TPM
944 Support TPM devices.
945
Christophe Ricard8759ff82015-10-06 22:54:41 +0200946 CONFIG_TPM_TIS_INFINEON
947 Support for Infineon i2c bus TPM devices. Only one device
Tom Wai-Hong Tame49fed52013-04-12 11:04:37 +0000948 per system is supported at this time.
949
Tom Wai-Hong Tame49fed52013-04-12 11:04:37 +0000950 CONFIG_TPM_TIS_I2C_BURST_LIMITATION
951 Define the burst count bytes upper limit
952
Christophe Ricard88249232016-01-21 23:27:13 +0100953 CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24
954 Support for STMicroelectronics TPM devices. Requires DM_TPM support.
955
956 CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24_I2C
957 Support for STMicroelectronics ST33ZP24 I2C devices.
958 Requires TPM_ST33ZP24 and I2C.
959
Christophe Ricard5ffadc32016-01-21 23:27:14 +0100960 CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24_SPI
961 Support for STMicroelectronics ST33ZP24 SPI devices.
962 Requires TPM_ST33ZP24 and SPI.
963
Dirk Eibach20489092013-06-26 15:55:15 +0200964 CONFIG_TPM_ATMEL_TWI
965 Support for Atmel TWI TPM device. Requires I2C support.
966
Che-liang Chiouacea5702013-04-12 11:04:34 +0000967 CONFIG_TPM_TIS_LPC
Vadim Bendeburydac69642011-10-17 08:36:14 +0000968 Support for generic parallel port TPM devices. Only one device
969 per system is supported at this time.
970
971 CONFIG_TPM_TIS_BASE_ADDRESS
972 Base address where the generic TPM device is mapped
973 to. Contemporary x86 systems usually map it at
974 0xfed40000.
975
Reinhard Pfau4fece432013-06-26 15:55:13 +0200976 CONFIG_TPM
977 Define this to enable the TPM support library which provides
978 functional interfaces to some TPM commands.
979 Requires support for a TPM device.
980
981 CONFIG_TPM_AUTH_SESSIONS
982 Define this to enable authorized functions in the TPM library.
983 Requires CONFIG_TPM and CONFIG_SHA1.
984
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000985- USB Support:
986 At the moment only the UHCI host controller is
Heiko Schocher6f90e582017-06-14 05:49:40 +0200987 supported (PIP405, MIP405); define
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000988 CONFIG_USB_UHCI to enable it.
989 define CONFIG_USB_KEYBOARD to enable the USB Keyboard
wdenkfb30b4c2004-10-09 22:44:59 +0000990 and define CONFIG_USB_STORAGE to enable the USB
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +0000991 storage devices.
992 Note:
993 Supported are USB Keyboards and USB Floppy drives
994 (TEAC FD-05PUB).
wdenk369d43d2004-03-14 14:09:05 +0000995
Simon Glass5978cdb2012-02-27 10:52:47 +0000996 CONFIG_USB_EHCI_TXFIFO_THRESH enables setting of the
997 txfilltuning field in the EHCI controller on reset.
998
Oleksandr Tymoshenko7a881752014-02-01 21:51:25 -0700999 CONFIG_USB_DWC2_REG_ADDR the physical CPU address of the DWC2
1000 HW module registers.
1001
Wolfgang Denk3f0137b2006-06-14 17:45:53 +02001002- USB Device:
1003 Define the below if you wish to use the USB console.
1004 Once firmware is rebuilt from a serial console issue the
1005 command "setenv stdin usbtty; setenv stdout usbtty" and
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02001006 attach your USB cable. The Unix command "dmesg" should print
Wolfgang Denk3f0137b2006-06-14 17:45:53 +02001007 it has found a new device. The environment variable usbtty
1008 can be set to gserial or cdc_acm to enable your device to
Wolfgang Denke2601822006-06-14 18:14:56 +02001009 appear to a USB host as a Linux gserial device or a
Wolfgang Denk3f0137b2006-06-14 17:45:53 +02001010 Common Device Class Abstract Control Model serial device.
1011 If you select usbtty = gserial you should be able to enumerate
1012 a Linux host by
1013 # modprobe usbserial vendor=0xVendorID product=0xProductID
1014 else if using cdc_acm, simply setting the environment
1015 variable usbtty to be cdc_acm should suffice. The following
1016 might be defined in YourBoardName.h
Wolfgang Denke2601822006-06-14 18:14:56 +02001017
Wolfgang Denk3f0137b2006-06-14 17:45:53 +02001018 CONFIG_USB_DEVICE
1019 Define this to build a UDC device
1020
1021 CONFIG_USB_TTY
1022 Define this to have a tty type of device available to
1023 talk to the UDC device
Wolfgang Denke2601822006-06-14 18:14:56 +02001024
Vipin KUMARbdb17702012-03-26 15:38:06 +05301025 CONFIG_USBD_HS
1026 Define this to enable the high speed support for usb
1027 device and usbtty. If this feature is enabled, a routine
1028 int is_usbd_high_speed(void)
1029 also needs to be defined by the driver to dynamically poll
1030 whether the enumeration has succeded at high speed or full
1031 speed.
1032
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02001033 CONFIG_SYS_CONSOLE_IS_IN_ENV
Wolfgang Denk3f0137b2006-06-14 17:45:53 +02001034 Define this if you want stdin, stdout &/or stderr to
1035 be set to usbtty.
1036
Wolfgang Denke2601822006-06-14 18:14:56 +02001037 If you have a USB-IF assigned VendorID then you may wish to
Wolfgang Denk3f0137b2006-06-14 17:45:53 +02001038 define your own vendor specific values either in BoardName.h
Wolfgang Denke2601822006-06-14 18:14:56 +02001039 or directly in usbd_vendor_info.h. If you don't define
Wolfgang Denk3f0137b2006-06-14 17:45:53 +02001040 CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER, CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME,
1041 CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID and CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID, then U-Boot
1042 should pretend to be a Linux device to it's target host.
1043
1044 CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER
1045 Define this string as the name of your company for
1046 - CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER "my company"
Wolfgang Denke2601822006-06-14 18:14:56 +02001047
Wolfgang Denk3f0137b2006-06-14 17:45:53 +02001048 CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME
1049 Define this string as the name of your product
1050 - CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME "acme usb device"
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001051
Wolfgang Denk3f0137b2006-06-14 17:45:53 +02001052 CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID
1053 Define this as your assigned Vendor ID from the USB
1054 Implementors Forum. This *must* be a genuine Vendor ID
1055 to avoid polluting the USB namespace.
1056 - CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID 0xFFFF
Wolfgang Denke2601822006-06-14 18:14:56 +02001057
Wolfgang Denk3f0137b2006-06-14 17:45:53 +02001058 CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID
1059 Define this as the unique Product ID
1060 for your device
1061 - CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID 0xFFFF
Wolfgang Denke2601822006-06-14 18:14:56 +02001062
Igor Grinbergac5f6ee2011-12-12 12:08:35 +02001063- ULPI Layer Support:
1064 The ULPI (UTMI Low Pin (count) Interface) PHYs are supported via
1065 the generic ULPI layer. The generic layer accesses the ULPI PHY
1066 via the platform viewport, so you need both the genric layer and
1067 the viewport enabled. Currently only Chipidea/ARC based
1068 viewport is supported.
1069 To enable the ULPI layer support, define CONFIG_USB_ULPI and
1070 CONFIG_USB_ULPI_VIEWPORT in your board configuration file.
Lucas Stachf31e4112012-10-01 00:44:35 +02001071 If your ULPI phy needs a different reference clock than the
1072 standard 24 MHz then you have to define CONFIG_ULPI_REF_CLK to
1073 the appropriate value in Hz.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001074
wdenk7a428cc2003-06-15 22:40:42 +00001075- MMC Support:
wdenk57b2d802003-06-27 21:31:46 +00001076 The MMC controller on the Intel PXA is supported. To
1077 enable this define CONFIG_MMC. The MMC can be
1078 accessed from the boot prompt by mapping the device
wdenk7a428cc2003-06-15 22:40:42 +00001079 to physical memory similar to flash. Command line is
Jon Loeligerc1da5c92007-06-11 19:03:39 -05001080 enabled with CONFIG_CMD_MMC. The MMC driver also works with
1081 the FAT fs. This is enabled with CONFIG_CMD_FAT.
wdenk7a428cc2003-06-15 22:40:42 +00001082
Yoshihiro Shimodadb7717b2011-07-04 22:21:22 +00001083 CONFIG_SH_MMCIF
1084 Support for Renesas on-chip MMCIF controller
1085
1086 CONFIG_SH_MMCIF_ADDR
1087 Define the base address of MMCIF registers
1088
1089 CONFIG_SH_MMCIF_CLK
1090 Define the clock frequency for MMCIF
1091
Tom Rini58a8d322013-03-14 05:32:47 +00001092- USB Device Firmware Update (DFU) class support:
Marek Vasut7f8d4362018-02-16 16:41:18 +01001093 CONFIG_DFU_OVER_USB
Tom Rini58a8d322013-03-14 05:32:47 +00001094 This enables the USB portion of the DFU USB class
1095
Pantelis Antonioucf14d0d2013-03-14 05:32:52 +00001096 CONFIG_DFU_NAND
1097 This enables support for exposing NAND devices via DFU.
1098
Afzal Mohammede3c687a2013-09-18 01:15:24 +05301099 CONFIG_DFU_RAM
1100 This enables support for exposing RAM via DFU.
1101 Note: DFU spec refer to non-volatile memory usage, but
1102 allow usages beyond the scope of spec - here RAM usage,
1103 one that would help mostly the developer.
1104
Heiko Schochera2f831e2013-06-12 06:05:51 +02001105 CONFIG_SYS_DFU_DATA_BUF_SIZE
1106 Dfu transfer uses a buffer before writing data to the
1107 raw storage device. Make the size (in bytes) of this buffer
1108 configurable. The size of this buffer is also configurable
1109 through the "dfu_bufsiz" environment variable.
1110
Pantelis Antonioua6e788d2013-03-14 05:32:48 +00001111 CONFIG_SYS_DFU_MAX_FILE_SIZE
1112 When updating files rather than the raw storage device,
1113 we use a static buffer to copy the file into and then write
1114 the buffer once we've been given the whole file. Define
1115 this to the maximum filesize (in bytes) for the buffer.
1116 Default is 4 MiB if undefined.
1117
Heiko Schochere1ba1512014-03-18 08:09:56 +01001118 DFU_DEFAULT_POLL_TIMEOUT
1119 Poll timeout [ms], is the timeout a device can send to the
1120 host. The host must wait for this timeout before sending
1121 a subsequent DFU_GET_STATUS request to the device.
1122
1123 DFU_MANIFEST_POLL_TIMEOUT
1124 Poll timeout [ms], which the device sends to the host when
1125 entering dfuMANIFEST state. Host waits this timeout, before
1126 sending again an USB request to the device.
1127
wdenkda04a8b2004-08-02 23:22:59 +00001128- Journaling Flash filesystem support:
Simon Glassfa8527b2016-10-02 18:00:59 -06001129 CONFIG_JFFS2_NAND
wdenkda04a8b2004-08-02 23:22:59 +00001130 Define these for a default partition on a NAND device
1131
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02001132 CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_FIRST_SECTOR,
1133 CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_FIRST_BANK, CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_NUM_BANKS
wdenkda04a8b2004-08-02 23:22:59 +00001134 Define these for a default partition on a NOR device
1135
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001136- Keyboard Support:
Simon Glasseaba37e2015-11-11 10:05:47 -07001137 See Kconfig help for available keyboard drivers.
1138
1139 CONFIG_KEYBOARD
1140
1141 Define this to enable a custom keyboard support.
1142 This simply calls drv_keyboard_init() which must be
1143 defined in your board-specific files. This option is deprecated
1144 and is only used by novena. For new boards, use driver model
1145 instead.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001146
1147- Video support:
Timur Tabi020edd22011-02-15 17:09:19 -06001148 CONFIG_FSL_DIU_FB
Wolfgang Denk825223d2011-09-11 21:24:09 +02001149 Enable the Freescale DIU video driver. Reference boards for
Timur Tabi020edd22011-02-15 17:09:19 -06001150 SOCs that have a DIU should define this macro to enable DIU
1151 support, and should also define these other macros:
1152
1153 CONFIG_SYS_DIU_ADDR
1154 CONFIG_VIDEO
Timur Tabi020edd22011-02-15 17:09:19 -06001155 CONFIG_CFB_CONSOLE
1156 CONFIG_VIDEO_SW_CURSOR
1157 CONFIG_VGA_AS_SINGLE_DEVICE
1158 CONFIG_VIDEO_LOGO
1159 CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_LOGO
1160
Timur Tabi32f709e2011-04-11 14:18:22 -05001161 The DIU driver will look for the 'video-mode' environment
1162 variable, and if defined, enable the DIU as a console during
Fabio Estevamd3ad5e52016-04-02 11:53:18 -03001163 boot. See the documentation file doc/README.video for a
Timur Tabi32f709e2011-04-11 14:18:22 -05001164 description of this variable.
Timur Tabi020edd22011-02-15 17:09:19 -06001165
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001166- LCD Support: CONFIG_LCD
1167
1168 Define this to enable LCD support (for output to LCD
1169 display); also select one of the supported displays
1170 by defining one of these:
1171
Stelian Popf6f86652008-05-09 21:57:18 +02001172 CONFIG_ATMEL_LCD:
1173
1174 HITACHI TX09D70VM1CCA, 3.5", 240x320.
1175
wdenkc0d54ae2003-11-25 16:55:19 +00001176 CONFIG_NEC_NL6448AC33:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001177
wdenkc0d54ae2003-11-25 16:55:19 +00001178 NEC NL6448AC33-18. Active, color, single scan.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001179
wdenkc0d54ae2003-11-25 16:55:19 +00001180 CONFIG_NEC_NL6448BC20
1181
1182 NEC NL6448BC20-08. 6.5", 640x480.
1183 Active, color, single scan.
1184
1185 CONFIG_NEC_NL6448BC33_54
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001186
wdenkc0d54ae2003-11-25 16:55:19 +00001187 NEC NL6448BC33-54. 10.4", 640x480.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001188 Active, color, single scan.
1189
1190 CONFIG_SHARP_16x9
1191
1192 Sharp 320x240. Active, color, single scan.
1193 It isn't 16x9, and I am not sure what it is.
1194
1195 CONFIG_SHARP_LQ64D341
1196
1197 Sharp LQ64D341 display, 640x480.
1198 Active, color, single scan.
1199
1200 CONFIG_HLD1045
1201
1202 HLD1045 display, 640x480.
1203 Active, color, single scan.
1204
1205 CONFIG_OPTREX_BW
1206
1207 Optrex CBL50840-2 NF-FW 99 22 M5
1208 or
1209 Hitachi LMG6912RPFC-00T
1210 or
1211 Hitachi SP14Q002
1212
1213 320x240. Black & white.
1214
Simon Glass599a4df2012-10-17 13:24:54 +00001215 CONFIG_LCD_ALIGNMENT
1216
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -08001217 Normally the LCD is page-aligned (typically 4KB). If this is
Simon Glass599a4df2012-10-17 13:24:54 +00001218 defined then the LCD will be aligned to this value instead.
1219 For ARM it is sometimes useful to use MMU_SECTION_SIZE
1220 here, since it is cheaper to change data cache settings on
1221 a per-section basis.
1222
1223
Hannes Petermaiera3c8e862015-03-27 08:01:38 +01001224 CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION
1225
1226 Sometimes, for example if the display is mounted in portrait
1227 mode or even if it's mounted landscape but rotated by 180degree,
1228 we need to rotate our content of the display relative to the
1229 framebuffer, so that user can read the messages which are
1230 printed out.
1231 Once CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION is defined, the lcd_console will be
1232 initialized with a given rotation from "vl_rot" out of
1233 "vidinfo_t" which is provided by the board specific code.
1234 The value for vl_rot is coded as following (matching to
1235 fbcon=rotate:<n> linux-kernel commandline):
1236 0 = no rotation respectively 0 degree
1237 1 = 90 degree rotation
1238 2 = 180 degree rotation
1239 3 = 270 degree rotation
1240
1241 If CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION is not defined, the console will be
1242 initialized with 0degree rotation.
1243
Tom Wai-Hong Tam79926a42012-09-28 15:11:16 +00001244 CONFIG_LCD_BMP_RLE8
1245
1246 Support drawing of RLE8-compressed bitmaps on the LCD.
1247
Tom Wai-Hong Tam6664f202012-12-05 14:46:40 +00001248 CONFIG_I2C_EDID
1249
1250 Enables an 'i2c edid' command which can read EDID
1251 information over I2C from an attached LCD display.
1252
wdenkeb20ad32003-09-05 23:19:14 +00001253- Splash Screen Support: CONFIG_SPLASH_SCREEN
wdenk92bbe3f2003-04-20 14:04:18 +00001254
wdenk57b2d802003-06-27 21:31:46 +00001255 If this option is set, the environment is checked for
1256 a variable "splashimage". If found, the usual display
1257 of logo, copyright and system information on the LCD
wdenk01686632004-06-30 22:59:18 +00001258 is suppressed and the BMP image at the address
wdenk57b2d802003-06-27 21:31:46 +00001259 specified in "splashimage" is loaded instead. The
1260 console is redirected to the "nulldev", too. This
1261 allows for a "silent" boot where a splash screen is
1262 loaded very quickly after power-on.
wdenk92bbe3f2003-04-20 14:04:18 +00001263
Nikita Kiryanov2f3e2ca2013-02-24 21:28:43 +00001264 CONFIG_SPLASHIMAGE_GUARD
1265
1266 If this option is set, then U-Boot will prevent the environment
1267 variable "splashimage" from being set to a problematic address
Fabio Estevama58b4912016-03-23 12:46:12 -03001268 (see doc/README.displaying-bmps).
Nikita Kiryanov2f3e2ca2013-02-24 21:28:43 +00001269 This option is useful for targets where, due to alignment
1270 restrictions, an improperly aligned BMP image will cause a data
1271 abort. If you think you will not have problems with unaligned
1272 accesses (for example because your toolchain prevents them)
1273 there is no need to set this option.
1274
Matthias Weisser53884182009-07-09 16:07:30 +02001275 CONFIG_SPLASH_SCREEN_ALIGN
1276
1277 If this option is set the splash image can be freely positioned
1278 on the screen. Environment variable "splashpos" specifies the
1279 position as "x,y". If a positive number is given it is used as
1280 number of pixel from left/top. If a negative number is given it
1281 is used as number of pixel from right/bottom. You can also
1282 specify 'm' for centering the image.
1283
1284 Example:
1285 setenv splashpos m,m
1286 => image at center of screen
1287
1288 setenv splashpos 30,20
1289 => image at x = 30 and y = 20
1290
1291 setenv splashpos -10,m
1292 => vertically centered image
1293 at x = dspWidth - bmpWidth - 9
1294
Stefan Roesed9d97742005-09-22 09:04:17 +02001295- Gzip compressed BMP image support: CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_GZIP
1296
1297 If this option is set, additionally to standard BMP
1298 images, gzipped BMP images can be displayed via the
1299 splashscreen support or the bmp command.
1300
Anatolij Gustschin6b4e4fc2010-03-15 14:50:25 +01001301- Run length encoded BMP image (RLE8) support: CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_RLE8
1302
1303 If this option is set, 8-bit RLE compressed BMP images
1304 can be displayed via the splashscreen support or the
1305 bmp command.
1306
wdenk0e2bd9c2004-06-06 21:51:03 +00001307- MII/PHY support:
wdenk0e2bd9c2004-06-06 21:51:03 +00001308 CONFIG_PHY_CLOCK_FREQ (ppc4xx)
1309
1310 The clock frequency of the MII bus
1311
wdenk0e2bd9c2004-06-06 21:51:03 +00001312 CONFIG_PHY_RESET_DELAY
1313
1314 Some PHY like Intel LXT971A need extra delay after
1315 reset before any MII register access is possible.
1316 For such PHY, set this option to the usec delay
1317 required. (minimum 300usec for LXT971A)
1318
1319 CONFIG_PHY_CMD_DELAY (ppc4xx)
1320
1321 Some PHY like Intel LXT971A need extra delay after
1322 command issued before MII status register can be read
1323
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001324- IP address:
1325 CONFIG_IPADDR
1326
1327 Define a default value for the IP address to use for
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02001328 the default Ethernet interface, in case this is not
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001329 determined through e.g. bootp.
Wolfgang Denk26da2992011-10-26 10:21:22 +00001330 (Environment variable "ipaddr")
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001331
1332- Server IP address:
1333 CONFIG_SERVERIP
1334
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02001335 Defines a default value for the IP address of a TFTP
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001336 server to contact when using the "tftboot" command.
Wolfgang Denk26da2992011-10-26 10:21:22 +00001337 (Environment variable "serverip")
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001338
Robin Getz470a6d42009-07-21 12:15:28 -04001339 CONFIG_KEEP_SERVERADDR
1340
1341 Keeps the server's MAC address, in the env 'serveraddr'
1342 for passing to bootargs (like Linux's netconsole option)
1343
Wolfgang Denk26da2992011-10-26 10:21:22 +00001344- Gateway IP address:
1345 CONFIG_GATEWAYIP
1346
1347 Defines a default value for the IP address of the
1348 default router where packets to other networks are
1349 sent to.
1350 (Environment variable "gatewayip")
1351
1352- Subnet mask:
1353 CONFIG_NETMASK
1354
1355 Defines a default value for the subnet mask (or
1356 routing prefix) which is used to determine if an IP
1357 address belongs to the local subnet or needs to be
1358 forwarded through a router.
1359 (Environment variable "netmask")
1360
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001361- BOOTP Recovery Mode:
1362 CONFIG_BOOTP_RANDOM_DELAY
1363
1364 If you have many targets in a network that try to
1365 boot using BOOTP, you may want to avoid that all
1366 systems send out BOOTP requests at precisely the same
1367 moment (which would happen for instance at recovery
1368 from a power failure, when all systems will try to
1369 boot, thus flooding the BOOTP server. Defining
1370 CONFIG_BOOTP_RANDOM_DELAY causes a random delay to be
1371 inserted before sending out BOOTP requests. The
Wolfgang Denkb65aaf92007-08-06 23:21:05 +02001372 following delays are inserted then:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001373
1374 1st BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 1 sec
1375 2nd BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 2 sec
1376 3rd BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 4 sec
1377 4th and following
1378 BOOTP requests: delay 0 ... 8 sec
1379
Thierry Reding8977cda2014-08-19 10:21:24 +02001380 CONFIG_BOOTP_ID_CACHE_SIZE
1381
1382 BOOTP packets are uniquely identified using a 32-bit ID. The
1383 server will copy the ID from client requests to responses and
1384 U-Boot will use this to determine if it is the destination of
1385 an incoming response. Some servers will check that addresses
1386 aren't in use before handing them out (usually using an ARP
1387 ping) and therefore take up to a few hundred milliseconds to
1388 respond. Network congestion may also influence the time it
1389 takes for a response to make it back to the client. If that
1390 time is too long, U-Boot will retransmit requests. In order
1391 to allow earlier responses to still be accepted after these
1392 retransmissions, U-Boot's BOOTP client keeps a small cache of
1393 IDs. The CONFIG_BOOTP_ID_CACHE_SIZE controls the size of this
1394 cache. The default is to keep IDs for up to four outstanding
1395 requests. Increasing this will allow U-Boot to accept offers
1396 from a BOOTP client in networks with unusually high latency.
1397
stroesee0aadfb2003-08-28 14:17:32 +00001398- DHCP Advanced Options:
Jon Loeliger5336a762007-07-09 22:08:34 -05001399 You can fine tune the DHCP functionality by defining
1400 CONFIG_BOOTP_* symbols:
stroesee0aadfb2003-08-28 14:17:32 +00001401
Jon Loeliger5336a762007-07-09 22:08:34 -05001402 CONFIG_BOOTP_NISDOMAIN
Jon Loeliger5336a762007-07-09 22:08:34 -05001403 CONFIG_BOOTP_BOOTFILESIZE
Jon Loeliger5336a762007-07-09 22:08:34 -05001404 CONFIG_BOOTP_NTPSERVER
1405 CONFIG_BOOTP_TIMEOFFSET
1406 CONFIG_BOOTP_VENDOREX
Joe Hershberger8ca7fa02012-05-23 07:59:19 +00001407 CONFIG_BOOTP_MAY_FAIL
stroesee0aadfb2003-08-28 14:17:32 +00001408
Wilson Callan22bcd6e2007-07-28 10:56:13 -04001409 CONFIG_BOOTP_SERVERIP - TFTP server will be the serverip
1410 environment variable, not the BOOTP server.
stroesee0aadfb2003-08-28 14:17:32 +00001411
Joe Hershberger8ca7fa02012-05-23 07:59:19 +00001412 CONFIG_BOOTP_MAY_FAIL - If the DHCP server is not found
1413 after the configured retry count, the call will fail
1414 instead of starting over. This can be used to fail over
1415 to Link-local IP address configuration if the DHCP server
1416 is not available.
1417
Aras Vaichas72aa3f32008-03-26 09:43:57 +11001418 CONFIG_BOOTP_DHCP_REQUEST_DELAY
1419
1420 A 32bit value in microseconds for a delay between
1421 receiving a "DHCP Offer" and sending the "DHCP Request".
1422 This fixes a problem with certain DHCP servers that don't
1423 respond 100% of the time to a "DHCP request". E.g. On an
1424 AT91RM9200 processor running at 180MHz, this delay needed
1425 to be *at least* 15,000 usec before a Windows Server 2003
1426 DHCP server would reply 100% of the time. I recommend at
1427 least 50,000 usec to be safe. The alternative is to hope
1428 that one of the retries will be successful but note that
1429 the DHCP timeout and retry process takes a longer than
1430 this delay.
1431
Joe Hershbergerb35a3a62012-05-23 08:00:12 +00001432 - Link-local IP address negotiation:
1433 Negotiate with other link-local clients on the local network
1434 for an address that doesn't require explicit configuration.
1435 This is especially useful if a DHCP server cannot be guaranteed
1436 to exist in all environments that the device must operate.
1437
1438 See doc/README.link-local for more information.
1439
Prabhakar Kushwaha2dec06f2017-11-23 16:51:32 +05301440 - MAC address from environment variables
1441
1442 FDT_SEQ_MACADDR_FROM_ENV
1443
1444 Fix-up device tree with MAC addresses fetched sequentially from
1445 environment variables. This config work on assumption that
1446 non-usable ethernet node of device-tree are either not present
1447 or their status has been marked as "disabled".
1448
wdenk145d2c12004-04-15 21:48:45 +00001449 - CDP Options:
wdenk05939202004-04-18 17:39:38 +00001450 CONFIG_CDP_DEVICE_ID
wdenk145d2c12004-04-15 21:48:45 +00001451
1452 The device id used in CDP trigger frames.
1453
1454 CONFIG_CDP_DEVICE_ID_PREFIX
1455
1456 A two character string which is prefixed to the MAC address
1457 of the device.
1458
1459 CONFIG_CDP_PORT_ID
1460
1461 A printf format string which contains the ascii name of
1462 the port. Normally is set to "eth%d" which sets
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02001463 eth0 for the first Ethernet, eth1 for the second etc.
wdenk145d2c12004-04-15 21:48:45 +00001464
1465 CONFIG_CDP_CAPABILITIES
1466
1467 A 32bit integer which indicates the device capabilities;
1468 0x00000010 for a normal host which does not forwards.
1469
1470 CONFIG_CDP_VERSION
1471
1472 An ascii string containing the version of the software.
1473
1474 CONFIG_CDP_PLATFORM
1475
1476 An ascii string containing the name of the platform.
1477
1478 CONFIG_CDP_TRIGGER
1479
1480 A 32bit integer sent on the trigger.
1481
1482 CONFIG_CDP_POWER_CONSUMPTION
1483
1484 A 16bit integer containing the power consumption of the
1485 device in .1 of milliwatts.
1486
1487 CONFIG_CDP_APPLIANCE_VLAN_TYPE
1488
1489 A byte containing the id of the VLAN.
1490
Uri Mashiach3dc6f652017-01-19 10:51:05 +02001491- Status LED: CONFIG_LED_STATUS
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001492
1493 Several configurations allow to display the current
1494 status using a LED. For instance, the LED will blink
1495 fast while running U-Boot code, stop blinking as
1496 soon as a reply to a BOOTP request was received, and
1497 start blinking slow once the Linux kernel is running
1498 (supported by a status LED driver in the Linux
Uri Mashiach3dc6f652017-01-19 10:51:05 +02001499 kernel). Defining CONFIG_LED_STATUS enables this
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001500 feature in U-Boot.
1501
Igor Grinberg4997a9e2013-11-08 01:03:50 +02001502 Additional options:
1503
Uri Mashiach3dc6f652017-01-19 10:51:05 +02001504 CONFIG_LED_STATUS_GPIO
Igor Grinberg4997a9e2013-11-08 01:03:50 +02001505 The status LED can be connected to a GPIO pin.
1506 In such cases, the gpio_led driver can be used as a
Uri Mashiach3dc6f652017-01-19 10:51:05 +02001507 status LED backend implementation. Define CONFIG_LED_STATUS_GPIO
Igor Grinberg4997a9e2013-11-08 01:03:50 +02001508 to include the gpio_led driver in the U-Boot binary.
1509
Igor Grinberg203bd9f2013-11-08 01:03:52 +02001510 CONFIG_GPIO_LED_INVERTED_TABLE
1511 Some GPIO connected LEDs may have inverted polarity in which
1512 case the GPIO high value corresponds to LED off state and
1513 GPIO low value corresponds to LED on state.
1514 In such cases CONFIG_GPIO_LED_INVERTED_TABLE may be defined
1515 with a list of GPIO LEDs that have inverted polarity.
1516
Heiko Schochere0e55bc2012-01-16 21:12:24 +00001517- I2C Support: CONFIG_SYS_I2C
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001518
Heiko Schochere0e55bc2012-01-16 21:12:24 +00001519 This enable the NEW i2c subsystem, and will allow you to use
1520 i2c commands at the u-boot command line (as long as you set
Heiko Schocher479a4cf2013-01-29 08:53:15 +01001521 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE
1522 for defining speed and slave address
1523 - activate second bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS2 define
1524 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_2 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_2
1525 for defining speed and slave address
1526 - activate third bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS3 define
1527 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_3 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_3
1528 for defining speed and slave address
1529 - activate fourth bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS4 define
1530 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_4 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_4
1531 for defining speed and slave address
Heiko Schochere0e55bc2012-01-16 21:12:24 +00001532
Heiko Schocherf2850742012-10-24 13:48:22 +02001533 - drivers/i2c/fsl_i2c.c:
1534 - activate i2c driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_FSL
1535 define CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_OFFSET for setting the register
1536 offset CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_SPEED for the i2c speed and
1537 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_SLAVE for the slave addr of the first
1538 bus.
Wolfgang Denkec7fbf52013-10-04 17:43:24 +02001539 - If your board supports a second fsl i2c bus, define
Heiko Schocherf2850742012-10-24 13:48:22 +02001540 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_OFFSET for the register offset
1541 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_SPEED for the speed and
1542 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_SLAVE for the slave address of the
1543 second bus.
1544
Simon Glass026fefb2012-10-30 07:28:53 +00001545 - drivers/i2c/tegra_i2c.c:
Nobuhiro Iwamatsu045acfa2013-10-11 16:23:53 +09001546 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_TEGRA
1547 - This driver adds 4 i2c buses with a fix speed from
1548 100000 and the slave addr 0!
Simon Glass026fefb2012-10-30 07:28:53 +00001549
Dirk Eibach42b204f2013-04-25 02:40:01 +00001550 - drivers/i2c/ppc4xx_i2c.c
1551 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX
1552 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX_CH0 activate hardware channel 0
1553 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX_CH1 activate hardware channel 1
1554
trema49f40a2013-09-21 18:13:35 +02001555 - drivers/i2c/i2c_mxc.c
1556 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC
Albert ARIBAUD \\(3ADEV\\)eb943872015-09-21 22:43:38 +02001557 - enable bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C1
1558 - enable bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C2
1559 - enable bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C3
1560 - enable bus 4 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C4
trema49f40a2013-09-21 18:13:35 +02001561 - define speed for bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C1_SPEED
1562 - define slave for bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C1_SLAVE
1563 - define speed for bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C2_SPEED
1564 - define slave for bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C2_SLAVE
1565 - define speed for bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C3_SPEED
1566 - define slave for bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C3_SLAVE
Albert ARIBAUD \\(3ADEV\\)eb943872015-09-21 22:43:38 +02001567 - define speed for bus 4 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C4_SPEED
1568 - define slave for bus 4 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C4_SLAVE
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -08001569 If those defines are not set, default value is 100000
trema49f40a2013-09-21 18:13:35 +02001570 for speed, and 0 for slave.
1571
Nobuhiro Iwamatsue94ea2f2013-09-27 16:58:30 +09001572 - drivers/i2c/rcar_i2c.c:
1573 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_RCAR
1574 - This driver adds 4 i2c buses
1575
Nobuhiro Iwamatsu12240102013-10-29 13:33:51 +09001576 - drivers/i2c/sh_i2c.c:
1577 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH
1578 - This driver adds from 2 to 5 i2c buses
1579
1580 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE0 for setting the register channel 0
1581 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED0 for for the speed channel 0
1582 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE1 for setting the register channel 1
1583 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED1 for for the speed channel 1
1584 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE2 for setting the register channel 2
1585 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED2 for for the speed channel 2
1586 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE3 for setting the register channel 3
1587 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED3 for for the speed channel 3
1588 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE4 for setting the register channel 4
1589 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED4 for for the speed channel 4
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -08001590 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_NUM_CONTROLLERS for number of i2c buses
Nobuhiro Iwamatsu12240102013-10-29 13:33:51 +09001591
Heiko Schocherf53f2b82013-10-22 11:03:18 +02001592 - drivers/i2c/omap24xx_i2c.c
1593 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_OMAP24XX
1594 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED speed channel 0
1595 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE slave addr channel 0
1596 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED1 speed channel 1
1597 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE1 slave addr channel 1
1598 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED2 speed channel 2
1599 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE2 slave addr channel 2
1600 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED3 speed channel 3
1601 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE3 slave addr channel 3
1602 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED4 speed channel 4
1603 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE4 slave addr channel 4
1604
Naveen Krishna Ch5d5efd32013-12-06 12:12:38 +05301605 - drivers/i2c/s3c24x0_i2c.c:
1606 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_S3C24X0
1607 - This driver adds i2c buses (11 for Exynos5250, Exynos5420
1608 9 i2c buses for Exynos4 and 1 for S3C24X0 SoCs from Samsung)
1609 with a fix speed from 100000 and the slave addr 0!
1610
Dirk Eibachb9577432014-07-03 09:28:18 +02001611 - drivers/i2c/ihs_i2c.c
1612 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS
1613 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH0 activate hardware channel 0
1614 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_0 speed channel 0
1615 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_0 slave addr channel 0
1616 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH1 activate hardware channel 1
1617 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_1 speed channel 1
1618 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_1 slave addr channel 1
1619 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH2 activate hardware channel 2
1620 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_2 speed channel 2
1621 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_2 slave addr channel 2
1622 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH3 activate hardware channel 3
1623 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_3 speed channel 3
1624 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_3 slave addr channel 3
Dirk Eibach9ac33852015-10-28 11:46:22 +01001625 - activate dual channel with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_DUAL
1626 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_0_1 speed channel 0_1
1627 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_0_1 slave addr channel 0_1
1628 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_1_1 speed channel 1_1
1629 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_1_1 slave addr channel 1_1
1630 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_2_1 speed channel 2_1
1631 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_2_1 slave addr channel 2_1
1632 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_3_1 speed channel 3_1
1633 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_3_1 slave addr channel 3_1
Dirk Eibachb9577432014-07-03 09:28:18 +02001634
Heiko Schochere0e55bc2012-01-16 21:12:24 +00001635 additional defines:
1636
1637 CONFIG_SYS_NUM_I2C_BUSES
Simon Glassb05e2b32016-10-02 18:01:05 -06001638 Hold the number of i2c buses you want to use.
Heiko Schochere0e55bc2012-01-16 21:12:24 +00001639
1640 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_DIRECT_BUS
1641 define this, if you don't use i2c muxes on your hardware.
1642 if CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS is not defined or == 0 you can
1643 omit this define.
1644
1645 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS
1646 define how many muxes are maximal consecutively connected
1647 on one i2c bus. If you not use i2c muxes, omit this
1648 define.
1649
1650 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_BUSES
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -08001651 hold a list of buses you want to use, only used if
Heiko Schochere0e55bc2012-01-16 21:12:24 +00001652 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_DIRECT_BUS is not defined, for example
1653 a board with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS = 1 and
1654 CONFIG_SYS_NUM_I2C_BUSES = 9:
1655
1656 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_BUSES {{0, {I2C_NULL_HOP}}, \
1657 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 1}}}, \
1658 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 2}}}, \
1659 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 3}}}, \
1660 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 4}}}, \
1661 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 5}}}, \
1662 {1, {I2C_NULL_HOP}}, \
1663 {1, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9544, 0x72, 1}}}, \
1664 {1, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9544, 0x72, 2}}}, \
1665 }
1666
1667 which defines
1668 bus 0 on adapter 0 without a mux
Heiko Schocher479a4cf2013-01-29 08:53:15 +01001669 bus 1 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 1
1670 bus 2 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 2
1671 bus 3 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 3
1672 bus 4 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 4
1673 bus 5 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 5
Heiko Schochere0e55bc2012-01-16 21:12:24 +00001674 bus 6 on adapter 1 without a mux
Heiko Schocher479a4cf2013-01-29 08:53:15 +01001675 bus 7 on adapter 1 with a PCA9544 on address 0x72 port 1
1676 bus 8 on adapter 1 with a PCA9544 on address 0x72 port 2
Heiko Schochere0e55bc2012-01-16 21:12:24 +00001677
1678 If you do not have i2c muxes on your board, omit this define.
1679
Simon Glass3efce392017-05-12 21:10:00 -06001680- Legacy I2C Support:
Heiko Schocher479a4cf2013-01-29 08:53:15 +01001681 If you use the software i2c interface (CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT)
wdenkb9bbd242003-06-30 16:24:52 +00001682 then the following macros need to be defined (examples are
1683 from include/configs/lwmon.h):
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001684
1685 I2C_INIT
1686
wdenkb9bbd242003-06-30 16:24:52 +00001687 (Optional). Any commands necessary to enable the I2C
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +00001688 controller or configure ports.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001689
wdenk544e9732004-02-06 23:19:44 +00001690 eg: #define I2C_INIT (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir |= PB_SCL)
wdenkb9bbd242003-06-30 16:24:52 +00001691
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001692 I2C_ACTIVE
1693
1694 The code necessary to make the I2C data line active
1695 (driven). If the data line is open collector, this
1696 define can be null.
1697
wdenkb9bbd242003-06-30 16:24:52 +00001698 eg: #define I2C_ACTIVE (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir |= PB_SDA)
1699
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001700 I2C_TRISTATE
1701
1702 The code necessary to make the I2C data line tri-stated
1703 (inactive). If the data line is open collector, this
1704 define can be null.
1705
wdenkb9bbd242003-06-30 16:24:52 +00001706 eg: #define I2C_TRISTATE (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir &= ~PB_SDA)
1707
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001708 I2C_READ
1709
York Sun4a598092013-04-01 11:29:11 -07001710 Code that returns true if the I2C data line is high,
1711 false if it is low.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001712
wdenkb9bbd242003-06-30 16:24:52 +00001713 eg: #define I2C_READ ((immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat & PB_SDA) != 0)
1714
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001715 I2C_SDA(bit)
1716
York Sun4a598092013-04-01 11:29:11 -07001717 If <bit> is true, sets the I2C data line high. If it
1718 is false, it clears it (low).
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001719
wdenkb9bbd242003-06-30 16:24:52 +00001720 eg: #define I2C_SDA(bit) \
wdenk2bb11052003-07-17 23:16:40 +00001721 if(bit) immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat |= PB_SDA; \
wdenk544e9732004-02-06 23:19:44 +00001722 else immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat &= ~PB_SDA
wdenkb9bbd242003-06-30 16:24:52 +00001723
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001724 I2C_SCL(bit)
1725
York Sun4a598092013-04-01 11:29:11 -07001726 If <bit> is true, sets the I2C clock line high. If it
1727 is false, it clears it (low).
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001728
wdenkb9bbd242003-06-30 16:24:52 +00001729 eg: #define I2C_SCL(bit) \
wdenk2bb11052003-07-17 23:16:40 +00001730 if(bit) immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat |= PB_SCL; \
wdenk544e9732004-02-06 23:19:44 +00001731 else immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat &= ~PB_SCL
wdenkb9bbd242003-06-30 16:24:52 +00001732
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001733 I2C_DELAY
1734
1735 This delay is invoked four times per clock cycle so this
1736 controls the rate of data transfer. The data rate thus
wdenkb9bbd242003-06-30 16:24:52 +00001737 is 1 / (I2C_DELAY * 4). Often defined to be something
wdenk21136db2003-07-16 21:53:01 +00001738 like:
1739
wdenkb9bbd242003-06-30 16:24:52 +00001740 #define I2C_DELAY udelay(2)
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001741
Mike Frysingeree12d542010-07-21 13:38:02 -04001742 CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_GPIO_SCL / CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_GPIO_SDA
1743
1744 If your arch supports the generic GPIO framework (asm/gpio.h),
1745 then you may alternatively define the two GPIOs that are to be
1746 used as SCL / SDA. Any of the previous I2C_xxx macros will
1747 have GPIO-based defaults assigned to them as appropriate.
1748
1749 You should define these to the GPIO value as given directly to
1750 the generic GPIO functions.
1751
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02001752 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_INIT_BOARD
wdenkcc1e2562003-03-06 13:39:27 +00001753
wdenk57b2d802003-06-27 21:31:46 +00001754 When a board is reset during an i2c bus transfer
1755 chips might think that the current transfer is still
1756 in progress. On some boards it is possible to access
1757 the i2c SCLK line directly, either by using the
1758 processor pin as a GPIO or by having a second pin
1759 connected to the bus. If this option is defined a
1760 custom i2c_init_board() routine in boards/xxx/board.c
1761 is run early in the boot sequence.
wdenkcc1e2562003-03-06 13:39:27 +00001762
Ben Warren45657152006-09-07 16:50:54 -04001763 CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS
1764
1765 This option allows the use of multiple I2C buses, each of which
Wolfgang Denk092ae952011-10-26 10:21:21 +00001766 must have a controller. At any point in time, only one bus is
1767 active. To switch to a different bus, use the 'i2c dev' command.
Ben Warren45657152006-09-07 16:50:54 -04001768 Note that bus numbering is zero-based.
1769
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02001770 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES
Ben Warren45657152006-09-07 16:50:54 -04001771
1772 This option specifies a list of I2C devices that will be skipped
Wolfgang Denk092ae952011-10-26 10:21:21 +00001773 when the 'i2c probe' command is issued. If CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS
Peter Tyser469cde42009-04-18 22:34:03 -05001774 is set, specify a list of bus-device pairs. Otherwise, specify
1775 a 1D array of device addresses
Ben Warren45657152006-09-07 16:50:54 -04001776
1777 e.g.
1778 #undef CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS
Wolfgang Denk092ae952011-10-26 10:21:21 +00001779 #define CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES {0x50,0x68}
Ben Warren45657152006-09-07 16:50:54 -04001780
1781 will skip addresses 0x50 and 0x68 on a board with one I2C bus
1782
Wolfgang Denk092ae952011-10-26 10:21:21 +00001783 #define CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS
Simon Glassb05e2b32016-10-02 18:01:05 -06001784 #define CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES {{0,0x50},{0,0x68},{1,0x54}}
Ben Warren45657152006-09-07 16:50:54 -04001785
1786 will skip addresses 0x50 and 0x68 on bus 0 and address 0x54 on bus 1
1787
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02001788 CONFIG_SYS_SPD_BUS_NUM
Timur Tabiab347542006-11-03 19:15:00 -06001789
1790 If defined, then this indicates the I2C bus number for DDR SPD.
1791 If not defined, then U-Boot assumes that SPD is on I2C bus 0.
1792
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02001793 CONFIG_SYS_RTC_BUS_NUM
Stefan Roese096cc9b2007-02-20 10:51:26 +01001794
1795 If defined, then this indicates the I2C bus number for the RTC.
1796 If not defined, then U-Boot assumes that RTC is on I2C bus 0.
1797
Andrew Dyer58c41f92008-12-29 17:36:01 -06001798 CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_READ_REPEATED_START
1799
1800 defining this will force the i2c_read() function in
1801 the soft_i2c driver to perform an I2C repeated start
1802 between writing the address pointer and reading the
1803 data. If this define is omitted the default behaviour
1804 of doing a stop-start sequence will be used. Most I2C
1805 devices can use either method, but some require one or
1806 the other.
Timur Tabiab347542006-11-03 19:15:00 -06001807
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001808- SPI Support: CONFIG_SPI
1809
1810 Enables SPI driver (so far only tested with
1811 SPI EEPROM, also an instance works with Crystal A/D and
1812 D/As on the SACSng board)
1813
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001814 CONFIG_SOFT_SPI
1815
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +00001816 Enables a software (bit-bang) SPI driver rather than
1817 using hardware support. This is a general purpose
1818 driver that only requires three general I/O port pins
1819 (two outputs, one input) to function. If this is
1820 defined, the board configuration must define several
1821 SPI configuration items (port pins to use, etc). For
1822 an example, see include/configs/sacsng.h.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001823
Heiko Schocherb77c8882014-07-14 10:22:11 +02001824 CONFIG_SYS_SPI_MXC_WAIT
1825 Timeout for waiting until spi transfer completed.
1826 default: (CONFIG_SYS_HZ/100) /* 10 ms */
1827
Matthias Fuchsa4400872007-12-27 17:12:34 +01001828- FPGA Support: CONFIG_FPGA
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001829
Matthias Fuchsa4400872007-12-27 17:12:34 +01001830 Enables FPGA subsystem.
1831
1832 CONFIG_FPGA_<vendor>
1833
1834 Enables support for specific chip vendors.
1835 (ALTERA, XILINX)
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001836
Matthias Fuchsa4400872007-12-27 17:12:34 +01001837 CONFIG_FPGA_<family>
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001838
Matthias Fuchsa4400872007-12-27 17:12:34 +01001839 Enables support for FPGA family.
1840 (SPARTAN2, SPARTAN3, VIRTEX2, CYCLONE2, ACEX1K, ACEX)
1841
1842 CONFIG_FPGA_COUNT
1843
1844 Specify the number of FPGA devices to support.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001845
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02001846 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_PROG_FEEDBACK
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001847
wdenk57b2d802003-06-27 21:31:46 +00001848 Enable printing of hash marks during FPGA configuration.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001849
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02001850 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_BUSY
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001851
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +00001852 Enable checks on FPGA configuration interface busy
1853 status by the configuration function. This option
1854 will require a board or device specific function to
1855 be written.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001856
1857 CONFIG_FPGA_DELAY
1858
1859 If defined, a function that provides delays in the FPGA
1860 configuration driver.
1861
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02001862 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_CTRLC
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001863 Allow Control-C to interrupt FPGA configuration
1864
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02001865 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_ERROR
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001866
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +00001867 Check for configuration errors during FPGA bitfile
1868 loading. For example, abort during Virtex II
1869 configuration if the INIT_B line goes low (which
1870 indicated a CRC error).
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001871
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02001872 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_INIT
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001873
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -08001874 Maximum time to wait for the INIT_B line to de-assert
1875 after PROB_B has been de-asserted during a Virtex II
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +00001876 FPGA configuration sequence. The default time is 500
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02001877 ms.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001878
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02001879 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_BUSY
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001880
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -08001881 Maximum time to wait for BUSY to de-assert during
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02001882 Virtex II FPGA configuration. The default is 5 ms.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001883
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02001884 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_CONFIG
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001885
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +00001886 Time to wait after FPGA configuration. The default is
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02001887 200 ms.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001888
1889- Configuration Management:
Stefan Roese141ed202014-10-22 12:13:24 +02001890
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001891 CONFIG_IDENT_STRING
1892
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +00001893 If defined, this string will be added to the U-Boot
1894 version information (U_BOOT_VERSION)
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001895
1896- Vendor Parameter Protection:
1897
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +00001898 U-Boot considers the values of the environment
1899 variables "serial#" (Board Serial Number) and
wdenkeb20ad32003-09-05 23:19:14 +00001900 "ethaddr" (Ethernet Address) to be parameters that
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +00001901 are set once by the board vendor / manufacturer, and
1902 protects these variables from casual modification by
1903 the user. Once set, these variables are read-only,
1904 and write or delete attempts are rejected. You can
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02001905 change this behaviour:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001906
1907 If CONFIG_ENV_OVERWRITE is #defined in your config
1908 file, the write protection for vendor parameters is
wdenkcc1e2562003-03-06 13:39:27 +00001909 completely disabled. Anybody can change or delete
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001910 these parameters.
1911
Joe Hershberger76f353e2015-05-04 14:55:14 -05001912 Alternatively, if you define _both_ an ethaddr in the
1913 default env _and_ CONFIG_OVERWRITE_ETHADDR_ONCE, a default
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02001914 Ethernet address is installed in the environment,
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001915 which can be changed exactly ONCE by the user. [The
1916 serial# is unaffected by this, i. e. it remains
1917 read-only.]
1918
Joe Hershberger71497d02012-12-11 22:16:31 -06001919 The same can be accomplished in a more flexible way
1920 for any variable by configuring the type of access
1921 to allow for those variables in the ".flags" variable
1922 or define CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC.
1923
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001924- Protected RAM:
1925 CONFIG_PRAM
1926
1927 Define this variable to enable the reservation of
1928 "protected RAM", i. e. RAM which is not overwritten
1929 by U-Boot. Define CONFIG_PRAM to hold the number of
1930 kB you want to reserve for pRAM. You can overwrite
1931 this default value by defining an environment
1932 variable "pram" to the number of kB you want to
1933 reserve. Note that the board info structure will
1934 still show the full amount of RAM. If pRAM is
1935 reserved, a new environment variable "mem" will
1936 automatically be defined to hold the amount of
1937 remaining RAM in a form that can be passed as boot
1938 argument to Linux, for instance like that:
1939
Wolfgang Denk86eb3b72005-11-20 21:40:11 +01001940 setenv bootargs ... mem=\${mem}
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001941 saveenv
1942
1943 This way you can tell Linux not to use this memory,
1944 either, which results in a memory region that will
1945 not be affected by reboots.
1946
1947 *WARNING* If your board configuration uses automatic
1948 detection of the RAM size, you must make sure that
1949 this memory test is non-destructive. So far, the
1950 following board configurations are known to be
1951 "pRAM-clean":
1952
Heiko Schocher65d94db2017-06-07 17:33:09 +02001953 IVMS8, IVML24, SPD8xx,
Wolfgang Denk90326762012-10-24 02:36:15 +00001954 HERMES, IP860, RPXlite, LWMON,
Heiko Schocher71cb3e92017-06-07 17:33:10 +02001955 FLAGADM
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001956
Gabe Blacka2f3a932012-12-02 04:55:18 +00001957- Access to physical memory region (> 4GB)
1958 Some basic support is provided for operations on memory not
1959 normally accessible to U-Boot - e.g. some architectures
1960 support access to more than 4GB of memory on 32-bit
1961 machines using physical address extension or similar.
1962 Define CONFIG_PHYSMEM to access this basic support, which
1963 currently only supports clearing the memory.
1964
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001965- Error Recovery:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001966 CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT
1967
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +00001968 This variable defines the number of retries for
1969 network operations like ARP, RARP, TFTP, or BOOTP
1970 before giving up the operation. If not defined, a
1971 default value of 5 is used.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001972
Guennadi Liakhovetskib38c2b32008-04-03 17:04:19 +02001973 CONFIG_ARP_TIMEOUT
1974
1975 Timeout waiting for an ARP reply in milliseconds.
1976
Tetsuyuki Kobayashi147e3902012-07-03 22:25:21 +00001977 CONFIG_NFS_TIMEOUT
1978
1979 Timeout in milliseconds used in NFS protocol.
1980 If you encounter "ERROR: Cannot umount" in nfs command,
1981 try longer timeout such as
1982 #define CONFIG_NFS_TIMEOUT 10000UL
1983
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001984- Command Interpreter:
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02001985 CONFIG_SYS_PROMPT_HUSH_PS2
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00001986
1987 This defines the secondary prompt string, which is
1988 printed when the command interpreter needs more input
1989 to complete a command. Usually "> ".
1990
1991 Note:
1992
wdenk57b2d802003-06-27 21:31:46 +00001993 In the current implementation, the local variables
1994 space and global environment variables space are
1995 separated. Local variables are those you define by
1996 simply typing `name=value'. To access a local
1997 variable later on, you have write `$name' or
1998 `${name}'; to execute the contents of a variable
1999 directly type `$name' at the command prompt.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002000
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +00002001 Global environment variables are those you use
2002 setenv/printenv to work with. To run a command stored
2003 in such a variable, you need to use the run command,
2004 and you must not use the '$' sign to access them.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002005
2006 To store commands and special characters in a
2007 variable, please use double quotation marks
2008 surrounding the whole text of the variable, instead
2009 of the backslashes before semicolons and special
2010 symbols.
2011
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -08002012- Command Line Editing and History:
Marek Vasut734fb042016-01-27 04:47:55 +01002013 CONFIG_CMDLINE_PS_SUPPORT
2014
2015 Enable support for changing the command prompt string
2016 at run-time. Only static string is supported so far.
2017 The string is obtained from environment variables PS1
2018 and PS2.
2019
wdenkc0aa5c52003-12-06 19:49:23 +00002020- Default Environment:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002021 CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS
2022
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +00002023 Define this to contain any number of null terminated
2024 strings (variable = value pairs) that will be part of
wdenkeb20ad32003-09-05 23:19:14 +00002025 the default environment compiled into the boot image.
wdenk591dda52002-11-18 00:14:45 +00002026
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +00002027 For example, place something like this in your
2028 board's config file:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002029
2030 #define CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS \
2031 "myvar1=value1\0" \
2032 "myvar2=value2\0"
2033
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +00002034 Warning: This method is based on knowledge about the
2035 internal format how the environment is stored by the
2036 U-Boot code. This is NOT an official, exported
2037 interface! Although it is unlikely that this format
wdenkeb20ad32003-09-05 23:19:14 +00002038 will change soon, there is no guarantee either.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002039 You better know what you are doing here.
2040
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +00002041 Note: overly (ab)use of the default environment is
2042 discouraged. Make sure to check other ways to preset
Wolfgang Denk85c25df2009-04-01 23:34:12 +02002043 the environment like the "source" command or the
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +00002044 boot command first.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002045
Simon Glass6b8d5fd2012-11-30 13:01:17 +00002046 CONFIG_DELAY_ENVIRONMENT
2047
2048 Normally the environment is loaded when the board is
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -08002049 initialised so that it is available to U-Boot. This inhibits
Simon Glass6b8d5fd2012-11-30 13:01:17 +00002050 that so that the environment is not available until
2051 explicitly loaded later by U-Boot code. With CONFIG_OF_CONTROL
2052 this is instead controlled by the value of
2053 /config/load-environment.
2054
Wolfgang Denke3cfce52005-09-24 22:37:32 +02002055- TFTP Fixed UDP Port:
2056 CONFIG_TFTP_PORT
2057
Wolfgang Denk227b5192005-09-24 23:25:46 +02002058 If this is defined, the environment variable tftpsrcp
Wolfgang Denke3cfce52005-09-24 22:37:32 +02002059 is used to supply the TFTP UDP source port value.
Wolfgang Denk227b5192005-09-24 23:25:46 +02002060 If tftpsrcp isn't defined, the normal pseudo-random port
Wolfgang Denke3cfce52005-09-24 22:37:32 +02002061 number generator is used.
2062
Wolfgang Denk227b5192005-09-24 23:25:46 +02002063 Also, the environment variable tftpdstp is used to supply
2064 the TFTP UDP destination port value. If tftpdstp isn't
2065 defined, the normal port 69 is used.
2066
2067 The purpose for tftpsrcp is to allow a TFTP server to
Wolfgang Denke3cfce52005-09-24 22:37:32 +02002068 blindly start the TFTP transfer using the pre-configured
2069 target IP address and UDP port. This has the effect of
2070 "punching through" the (Windows XP) firewall, allowing
2071 the remainder of the TFTP transfer to proceed normally.
2072 A better solution is to properly configure the firewall,
2073 but sometimes that is not allowed.
2074
Wolfgang Denkd590fb12011-10-07 09:58:21 +02002075 CONFIG_STANDALONE_LOAD_ADDR
2076
Wolfgang Denk23f78482011-10-09 21:06:34 +02002077 This option defines a board specific value for the
2078 address where standalone program gets loaded, thus
2079 overwriting the architecture dependent default
Wolfgang Denkd590fb12011-10-07 09:58:21 +02002080 settings.
2081
2082- Frame Buffer Address:
2083 CONFIG_FB_ADDR
2084
2085 Define CONFIG_FB_ADDR if you want to use specific
Wolfgang Denka71eb8e2013-01-03 00:43:59 +00002086 address for frame buffer. This is typically the case
2087 when using a graphics controller has separate video
2088 memory. U-Boot will then place the frame buffer at
2089 the given address instead of dynamically reserving it
2090 in system RAM by calling lcd_setmem(), which grabs
2091 the memory for the frame buffer depending on the
2092 configured panel size.
Wolfgang Denkd590fb12011-10-07 09:58:21 +02002093
2094 Please see board_init_f function.
2095
Detlev Zundel0ecb6112009-12-01 17:16:19 +01002096- Automatic software updates via TFTP server
2097 CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP
2098 CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_CNT_MAX
2099 CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_MSEC_MAX
2100
2101 These options enable and control the auto-update feature;
2102 for a more detailed description refer to doc/README.update.
2103
2104- MTD Support (mtdparts command, UBI support)
Heiko Schocherf5895d12014-06-24 10:10:04 +02002105 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_WL_THRESHOLD
2106 This parameter defines the maximum difference between the highest
2107 erase counter value and the lowest erase counter value of eraseblocks
2108 of UBI devices. When this threshold is exceeded, UBI starts performing
2109 wear leveling by means of moving data from eraseblock with low erase
2110 counter to eraseblocks with high erase counter.
2111
2112 The default value should be OK for SLC NAND flashes, NOR flashes and
2113 other flashes which have eraseblock life-cycle 100000 or more.
2114 However, in case of MLC NAND flashes which typically have eraseblock
2115 life-cycle less than 10000, the threshold should be lessened (e.g.,
2116 to 128 or 256, although it does not have to be power of 2).
2117
2118 default: 4096
Simon Glass6c0be912014-10-23 18:58:54 -06002119
Heiko Schocherf5895d12014-06-24 10:10:04 +02002120 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_BEB_LIMIT
2121 This option specifies the maximum bad physical eraseblocks UBI
2122 expects on the MTD device (per 1024 eraseblocks). If the
2123 underlying flash does not admit of bad eraseblocks (e.g. NOR
2124 flash), this value is ignored.
2125
2126 NAND datasheets often specify the minimum and maximum NVM
2127 (Number of Valid Blocks) for the flashes' endurance lifetime.
2128 The maximum expected bad eraseblocks per 1024 eraseblocks
2129 then can be calculated as "1024 * (1 - MinNVB / MaxNVB)",
2130 which gives 20 for most NANDs (MaxNVB is basically the total
2131 count of eraseblocks on the chip).
2132
2133 To put it differently, if this value is 20, UBI will try to
2134 reserve about 1.9% of physical eraseblocks for bad blocks
2135 handling. And that will be 1.9% of eraseblocks on the entire
2136 NAND chip, not just the MTD partition UBI attaches. This means
2137 that if you have, say, a NAND flash chip admits maximum 40 bad
2138 eraseblocks, and it is split on two MTD partitions of the same
2139 size, UBI will reserve 40 eraseblocks when attaching a
2140 partition.
2141
2142 default: 20
2143
2144 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP
2145 Fastmap is a mechanism which allows attaching an UBI device
2146 in nearly constant time. Instead of scanning the whole MTD device it
2147 only has to locate a checkpoint (called fastmap) on the device.
2148 The on-flash fastmap contains all information needed to attach
2149 the device. Using fastmap makes only sense on large devices where
2150 attaching by scanning takes long. UBI will not automatically install
2151 a fastmap on old images, but you can set the UBI parameter
2152 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP_AUTOCONVERT to 1 if you want so. Please note
2153 that fastmap-enabled images are still usable with UBI implementations
2154 without fastmap support. On typical flash devices the whole fastmap
2155 fits into one PEB. UBI will reserve PEBs to hold two fastmaps.
2156
2157 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP_AUTOCONVERT
2158 Set this parameter to enable fastmap automatically on images
2159 without a fastmap.
2160 default: 0
2161
Heiko Schocher94b66de2015-10-22 06:19:21 +02002162 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FM_DEBUG
2163 Enable UBI fastmap debug
2164 default: 0
2165
Daniel Schwierzeck39ca08e2011-07-18 07:48:07 +00002166- SPL framework
Wolfgang Denk825223d2011-09-11 21:24:09 +02002167 CONFIG_SPL
2168 Enable building of SPL globally.
Daniel Schwierzeck39ca08e2011-07-18 07:48:07 +00002169
Tom Rini36853852012-02-14 07:29:40 +00002170 CONFIG_SPL_LDSCRIPT
2171 LDSCRIPT for linking the SPL binary.
2172
Albert ARIBAUDe916e052013-04-12 05:14:30 +00002173 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT
2174 Maximum size in memory allocated to the SPL, BSS included.
2175 When defined, the linker checks that the actual memory
2176 used by SPL from _start to __bss_end does not exceed it.
Albert ARIBAUDafab1482013-04-14 04:48:38 +00002177 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT and CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE
Albert ARIBAUDe916e052013-04-12 05:14:30 +00002178 must not be both defined at the same time.
2179
Tom Rini36853852012-02-14 07:29:40 +00002180 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE
Albert ARIBAUDe916e052013-04-12 05:14:30 +00002181 Maximum size of the SPL image (text, data, rodata, and
2182 linker lists sections), BSS excluded.
2183 When defined, the linker checks that the actual size does
2184 not exceed it.
Tom Rini36853852012-02-14 07:29:40 +00002185
Scott Woodc4f0d002012-09-20 19:05:12 -05002186 CONFIG_SPL_RELOC_TEXT_BASE
2187 Address to relocate to. If unspecified, this is equal to
2188 CONFIG_SPL_TEXT_BASE (i.e. no relocation is done).
2189
Tom Rini36853852012-02-14 07:29:40 +00002190 CONFIG_SPL_BSS_START_ADDR
2191 Link address for the BSS within the SPL binary.
2192
2193 CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE
Albert ARIBAUDe916e052013-04-12 05:14:30 +00002194 Maximum size in memory allocated to the SPL BSS.
2195 When defined, the linker checks that the actual memory used
2196 by SPL from __bss_start to __bss_end does not exceed it.
Albert ARIBAUDafab1482013-04-14 04:48:38 +00002197 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT and CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE
Albert ARIBAUDe916e052013-04-12 05:14:30 +00002198 must not be both defined at the same time.
Tom Rini36853852012-02-14 07:29:40 +00002199
2200 CONFIG_SPL_STACK
2201 Adress of the start of the stack SPL will use
2202
Albert ARIBAUD \(3ADEV\)287b0942015-03-31 11:40:50 +02002203 CONFIG_SPL_PANIC_ON_RAW_IMAGE
2204 When defined, SPL will panic() if the image it has
2205 loaded does not have a signature.
2206 Defining this is useful when code which loads images
2207 in SPL cannot guarantee that absolutely all read errors
2208 will be caught.
2209 An example is the LPC32XX MLC NAND driver, which will
2210 consider that a completely unreadable NAND block is bad,
2211 and thus should be skipped silently.
2212
Scott Woodc4f0d002012-09-20 19:05:12 -05002213 CONFIG_SPL_RELOC_STACK
2214 Adress of the start of the stack SPL will use after
2215 relocation. If unspecified, this is equal to
2216 CONFIG_SPL_STACK.
2217
Tom Rini36853852012-02-14 07:29:40 +00002218 CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_START
2219 Starting address of the malloc pool used in SPL.
Fabio Estevam38e1a972015-11-12 12:30:19 -02002220 When this option is set the full malloc is used in SPL and
2221 it is set up by spl_init() and before that, the simple malloc()
2222 can be used if CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_F is defined.
Tom Rini36853852012-02-14 07:29:40 +00002223
2224 CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_SIZE
2225 The size of the malloc pool used in SPL.
Daniel Schwierzeck39ca08e2011-07-18 07:48:07 +00002226
Tom Rinic2b76002014-03-28 12:03:39 -04002227 CONFIG_SPL_OS_BOOT
2228 Enable booting directly to an OS from SPL.
2229 See also: doc/README.falcon
2230
Tom Rinife3b0c72012-08-13 11:37:56 -07002231 CONFIG_SPL_DISPLAY_PRINT
2232 For ARM, enable an optional function to print more information
2233 about the running system.
2234
Scott Wood7c810902012-09-20 16:35:21 -05002235 CONFIG_SPL_INIT_MINIMAL
2236 Arch init code should be built for a very small image
2237
Paul Kocialkowski17675c82014-11-08 23:14:56 +01002238 CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_U_BOOT_PARTITION
2239 Partition on the MMC to load U-Boot from when the MMC is being
2240 used in raw mode
2241
Peter Korsgaard01b542f2013-05-13 08:36:29 +00002242 CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_KERNEL_SECTOR
2243 Sector to load kernel uImage from when MMC is being
2244 used in raw mode (for Falcon mode)
2245
2246 CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_ARGS_SECTOR,
2247 CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_ARGS_SECTORS
2248 Sector and number of sectors to load kernel argument
2249 parameters from when MMC is being used in raw mode
2250 (for falcon mode)
2251
Guillaume GARDET5065b712014-10-15 17:53:13 +02002252 CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_PAYLOAD_NAME
2253 Filename to read to load U-Boot when reading from filesystem
2254
2255 CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_KERNEL_NAME
Peter Korsgaard465f1f82013-05-13 08:36:27 +00002256 Filename to read to load kernel uImage when reading
Guillaume GARDET5065b712014-10-15 17:53:13 +02002257 from filesystem (for Falcon mode)
Peter Korsgaard465f1f82013-05-13 08:36:27 +00002258
Guillaume GARDET5065b712014-10-15 17:53:13 +02002259 CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_ARGS_NAME
Peter Korsgaard465f1f82013-05-13 08:36:27 +00002260 Filename to read to load kernel argument parameters
Guillaume GARDET5065b712014-10-15 17:53:13 +02002261 when reading from filesystem (for Falcon mode)
Peter Korsgaard465f1f82013-05-13 08:36:27 +00002262
Scott Wood2b36fbb2012-12-06 13:33:17 +00002263 CONFIG_SPL_MPC83XX_WAIT_FOR_NAND
2264 Set this for NAND SPL on PPC mpc83xx targets, so that
2265 start.S waits for the rest of the SPL to load before
2266 continuing (the hardware starts execution after just
2267 loading the first page rather than the full 4K).
2268
Prabhakar Kushwaha6e2b9a32014-04-08 19:12:31 +05302269 CONFIG_SPL_SKIP_RELOCATE
2270 Avoid SPL relocation
2271
Jörg Krause6f8190f2018-01-14 19:26:38 +01002272 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_IDENT
2273 SPL uses the chip ID list to identify the NAND flash.
2274 Requires CONFIG_SPL_NAND_BASE.
2275
Thomas Gleixner820d24d2016-07-12 20:28:12 +02002276 CONFIG_SPL_UBI
2277 Support for a lightweight UBI (fastmap) scanner and
2278 loader
2279
Heiko Schochercf000272014-10-31 08:31:00 +01002280 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_RAW_ONLY
2281 Support to boot only raw u-boot.bin images. Use this only
2282 if you need to save space.
2283
Ying Zhangdfb2b152013-08-16 15:16:12 +08002284 CONFIG_SPL_COMMON_INIT_DDR
2285 Set for common ddr init with serial presence detect in
2286 SPL binary.
2287
Tom Rini36853852012-02-14 07:29:40 +00002288 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_5_ADDR_CYCLE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_PAGE_COUNT,
2289 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_PAGE_SIZE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_OOBSIZE,
2290 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BLOCK_SIZE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BAD_BLOCK_POS,
2291 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCPOS, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCSIZE,
2292 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCBYTES
2293 Defines the size and behavior of the NAND that SPL uses
Scott Wood36c440e2012-09-21 18:35:27 -05002294 to read U-Boot
Tom Rini36853852012-02-14 07:29:40 +00002295
2296 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_OFFS
Scott Wood36c440e2012-09-21 18:35:27 -05002297 Location in NAND to read U-Boot from
2298
2299 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_DST
2300 Location in memory to load U-Boot to
2301
2302 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_SIZE
2303 Size of image to load
Tom Rini36853852012-02-14 07:29:40 +00002304
2305 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_START
Scott Wood36c440e2012-09-21 18:35:27 -05002306 Entry point in loaded image to jump to
Tom Rini36853852012-02-14 07:29:40 +00002307
2308 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_HW_ECC_OOBFIRST
2309 Define this if you need to first read the OOB and then the
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -08002310 data. This is used, for example, on davinci platforms.
Tom Rini36853852012-02-14 07:29:40 +00002311
Pavel Machekde997252012-08-30 22:42:11 +02002312 CONFIG_SPL_RAM_DEVICE
2313 Support for running image already present in ram, in SPL binary
2314
Scott Woodeb7bd972012-12-06 13:33:16 +00002315 CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO
Benoît Thébaudeauf0180722013-04-11 09:35:49 +00002316 Image offset to which the SPL should be padded before appending
2317 the SPL payload. By default, this is defined as
2318 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE, or 0 if CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE is undefined.
2319 CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO must be either 0, meaning to append the SPL
2320 payload without any padding, or >= CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE.
Scott Woodeb7bd972012-12-06 13:33:16 +00002321
Scott Woodf147eb72012-09-21 16:27:32 -05002322 CONFIG_SPL_TARGET
2323 Final target image containing SPL and payload. Some SPLs
2324 use an arch-specific makefile fragment instead, for
2325 example if more than one image needs to be produced.
2326
Marek Vasut9f2e0eb2018-05-13 00:22:52 +02002327 CONFIG_SPL_FIT_PRINT
Simon Glass82d94532013-05-08 08:05:59 +00002328 Printing information about a FIT image adds quite a bit of
2329 code to SPL. So this is normally disabled in SPL. Use this
2330 option to re-enable it. This will affect the output of the
2331 bootm command when booting a FIT image.
2332
Ying Zhang2d2e3b62013-08-16 15:16:15 +08002333- TPL framework
2334 CONFIG_TPL
2335 Enable building of TPL globally.
2336
2337 CONFIG_TPL_PAD_TO
2338 Image offset to which the TPL should be padded before appending
2339 the TPL payload. By default, this is defined as
Wolfgang Denkec7fbf52013-10-04 17:43:24 +02002340 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE, or 0 if CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE is undefined.
2341 CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO must be either 0, meaning to append the SPL
2342 payload without any padding, or >= CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE.
Ying Zhang2d2e3b62013-08-16 15:16:15 +08002343
wdenkc0aa5c52003-12-06 19:49:23 +00002344- Interrupt support (PPC):
2345
wdenk1ebf41e2004-01-02 14:00:00 +00002346 There are common interrupt_init() and timer_interrupt()
2347 for all PPC archs. interrupt_init() calls interrupt_init_cpu()
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02002348 for CPU specific initialization. interrupt_init_cpu()
wdenk1ebf41e2004-01-02 14:00:00 +00002349 should set decrementer_count to appropriate value. If
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02002350 CPU resets decrementer automatically after interrupt
wdenk1ebf41e2004-01-02 14:00:00 +00002351 (ppc4xx) it should set decrementer_count to zero.
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02002352 timer_interrupt() calls timer_interrupt_cpu() for CPU
wdenk1ebf41e2004-01-02 14:00:00 +00002353 specific handling. If board has watchdog / status_led
2354 / other_activity_monitor it works automatically from
2355 general timer_interrupt().
wdenkc0aa5c52003-12-06 19:49:23 +00002356
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002357
Helmut Raigerd5a184b2011-10-20 04:19:47 +00002358Board initialization settings:
2359------------------------------
2360
2361During Initialization u-boot calls a number of board specific functions
2362to allow the preparation of board specific prerequisites, e.g. pin setup
2363before drivers are initialized. To enable these callbacks the
2364following configuration macros have to be defined. Currently this is
2365architecture specific, so please check arch/your_architecture/lib/board.c
2366typically in board_init_f() and board_init_r().
2367
2368- CONFIG_BOARD_EARLY_INIT_F: Call board_early_init_f()
2369- CONFIG_BOARD_EARLY_INIT_R: Call board_early_init_r()
2370- CONFIG_BOARD_LATE_INIT: Call board_late_init()
2371- CONFIG_BOARD_POSTCLK_INIT: Call board_postclk_init()
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002372
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002373Configuration Settings:
2374-----------------------
2375
Simon Glass8927bf22019-12-28 10:45:10 -07002376- MEM_SUPPORT_64BIT_DATA: Defined automatically if compiled as 64-bit.
York Sun6c480012014-02-26 17:03:19 -08002377 Optionally it can be defined to support 64-bit memory commands.
2378
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002379- CONFIG_SYS_LONGHELP: Defined when you want long help messages included;
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002380 undefine this when you're short of memory.
2381
Peter Tyserdfb72b82009-01-27 18:03:12 -06002382- CONFIG_SYS_HELP_CMD_WIDTH: Defined when you want to override the default
2383 width of the commands listed in the 'help' command output.
2384
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002385- CONFIG_SYS_PROMPT: This is what U-Boot prints on the console to
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002386 prompt for user input.
2387
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002388- CONFIG_SYS_CBSIZE: Buffer size for input from the Console
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002389
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002390- CONFIG_SYS_PBSIZE: Buffer size for Console output
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002391
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002392- CONFIG_SYS_MAXARGS: max. Number of arguments accepted for monitor commands
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002393
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002394- CONFIG_SYS_BARGSIZE: Buffer size for Boot Arguments which are passed to
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002395 the application (usually a Linux kernel) when it is
2396 booted
2397
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002398- CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002399 List of legal baudrate settings for this board.
2400
York Sun5d286cd2015-12-04 11:57:07 -08002401- CONFIG_SYS_MEM_RESERVE_SECURE
York Sun1ef95cc2016-06-24 16:46:18 -07002402 Only implemented for ARMv8 for now.
York Sun5d286cd2015-12-04 11:57:07 -08002403 If defined, the size of CONFIG_SYS_MEM_RESERVE_SECURE memory
2404 is substracted from total RAM and won't be reported to OS.
2405 This memory can be used as secure memory. A variable
York Sun1ef95cc2016-06-24 16:46:18 -07002406 gd->arch.secure_ram is used to track the location. In systems
York Sun5d286cd2015-12-04 11:57:07 -08002407 the RAM base is not zero, or RAM is divided into banks,
2408 this variable needs to be recalcuated to get the address.
2409
York Sun50739372015-12-07 11:05:29 -08002410- CONFIG_SYS_MEM_TOP_HIDE:
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002411 If CONFIG_SYS_MEM_TOP_HIDE is defined in the board config header,
Stefan Roesea13709f2008-03-26 10:14:11 +01002412 this specified memory area will get subtracted from the top
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02002413 (end) of RAM and won't get "touched" at all by U-Boot. By
Stefan Roesea13709f2008-03-26 10:14:11 +01002414 fixing up gd->ram_size the Linux kernel should gets passed
2415 the now "corrected" memory size and won't touch it either.
2416 This should work for arch/ppc and arch/powerpc. Only Linux
Stefan Roese37f31bf2008-03-28 11:02:53 +01002417 board ports in arch/powerpc with bootwrapper support that
Stefan Roesea13709f2008-03-26 10:14:11 +01002418 recalculate the memory size from the SDRAM controller setup
Stefan Roese37f31bf2008-03-28 11:02:53 +01002419 will have to get fixed in Linux additionally.
Stefan Roesea13709f2008-03-26 10:14:11 +01002420
2421 This option can be used as a workaround for the 440EPx/GRx
2422 CHIP 11 errata where the last 256 bytes in SDRAM shouldn't
2423 be touched.
2424
2425 WARNING: Please make sure that this value is a multiple of
2426 the Linux page size (normally 4k). If this is not the case,
2427 then the end address of the Linux memory will be located at a
2428 non page size aligned address and this could cause major
2429 problems.
2430
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002431- CONFIG_SYS_LOADS_BAUD_CHANGE:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002432 Enable temporary baudrate change while serial download
2433
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002434- CONFIG_SYS_SDRAM_BASE:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002435 Physical start address of SDRAM. _Must_ be 0 here.
2436
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002437- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002438 Physical start address of Flash memory.
2439
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002440- CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002441 Physical start address of boot monitor code (set by
2442 make config files to be same as the text base address
Wolfgang Denk0708bc62010-10-07 21:51:12 +02002443 (CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE) used when linking) - same as
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002444 CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE when booting from flash.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002445
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002446- CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_LEN:
wdenk57b2d802003-06-27 21:31:46 +00002447 Size of memory reserved for monitor code, used to
2448 determine _at_compile_time_ (!) if the environment is
2449 embedded within the U-Boot image, or in a separate
2450 flash sector.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002451
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002452- CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002453 Size of DRAM reserved for malloc() use.
2454
Simon Glass863e4042014-07-10 22:23:28 -06002455- CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_F_LEN
2456 Size of the malloc() pool for use before relocation. If
2457 this is defined, then a very simple malloc() implementation
2458 will become available before relocation. The address is just
2459 below the global data, and the stack is moved down to make
2460 space.
2461
2462 This feature allocates regions with increasing addresses
2463 within the region. calloc() is supported, but realloc()
2464 is not available. free() is supported but does nothing.
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -08002465 The memory will be freed (or in fact just forgotten) when
Simon Glass863e4042014-07-10 22:23:28 -06002466 U-Boot relocates itself.
2467
Simon Glass9fa901b2014-11-10 17:16:54 -07002468- CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_SIMPLE
2469 Provides a simple and small malloc() and calloc() for those
2470 boards which do not use the full malloc in SPL (which is
2471 enabled with CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_START).
2472
Thierry Redingc97d9742014-12-09 22:25:22 -07002473- CONFIG_SYS_NONCACHED_MEMORY:
2474 Size of non-cached memory area. This area of memory will be
2475 typically located right below the malloc() area and mapped
2476 uncached in the MMU. This is useful for drivers that would
2477 otherwise require a lot of explicit cache maintenance. For
2478 some drivers it's also impossible to properly maintain the
2479 cache. For example if the regions that need to be flushed
2480 are not a multiple of the cache-line size, *and* padding
2481 cannot be allocated between the regions to align them (i.e.
2482 if the HW requires a contiguous array of regions, and the
2483 size of each region is not cache-aligned), then a flush of
2484 one region may result in overwriting data that hardware has
2485 written to another region in the same cache-line. This can
2486 happen for example in network drivers where descriptors for
2487 buffers are typically smaller than the CPU cache-line (e.g.
2488 16 bytes vs. 32 or 64 bytes).
2489
2490 Non-cached memory is only supported on 32-bit ARM at present.
2491
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002492- CONFIG_SYS_BOOTM_LEN:
Stefan Roese5d5ce292006-03-13 11:16:36 +01002493 Normally compressed uImages are limited to an
2494 uncompressed size of 8 MBytes. If this is not enough,
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002495 you can define CONFIG_SYS_BOOTM_LEN in your board config file
Stefan Roese5d5ce292006-03-13 11:16:36 +01002496 to adjust this setting to your needs.
2497
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002498- CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002499 Maximum size of memory mapped by the startup code of
2500 the Linux kernel; all data that must be processed by
Bartlomiej Siekac5648c82008-04-14 15:44:16 +02002501 the Linux kernel (bd_info, boot arguments, FDT blob if
2502 used) must be put below this limit, unless "bootm_low"
Robert P. J. Day832d36e2013-09-16 07:15:45 -04002503 environment variable is defined and non-zero. In such case
Bartlomiej Siekac5648c82008-04-14 15:44:16 +02002504 all data for the Linux kernel must be between "bootm_low"
Wolfgang Denk092ae952011-10-26 10:21:21 +00002505 and "bootm_low" + CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ. The environment
Grant Likely26396382011-03-28 09:58:43 +00002506 variable "bootm_mapsize" will override the value of
2507 CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ. If CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ is undefined,
2508 then the value in "bootm_size" will be used instead.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002509
John Rigbyeea8e692010-10-13 13:57:35 -06002510- CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_RAMDISK_HIGH:
2511 Enable initrd_high functionality. If defined then the
2512 initrd_high feature is enabled and the bootm ramdisk subcommand
2513 is enabled.
2514
2515- CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_GET_CMDLINE:
2516 Enables allocating and saving kernel cmdline in space between
2517 "bootm_low" and "bootm_low" + BOOTMAPSZ.
2518
2519- CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_GET_KBD:
2520 Enables allocating and saving a kernel copy of the bd_info in
2521 space between "bootm_low" and "bootm_low" + BOOTMAPSZ.
2522
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002523- CONFIG_SYS_MAX_FLASH_BANKS:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002524 Max number of Flash memory banks
2525
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002526- CONFIG_SYS_MAX_FLASH_SECT:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002527 Max number of sectors on a Flash chip
2528
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002529- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_ERASE_TOUT:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002530 Timeout for Flash erase operations (in ms)
2531
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002532- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_WRITE_TOUT:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002533 Timeout for Flash write operations (in ms)
2534
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002535- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_LOCK_TOUT
wdenkdccbda02003-07-14 22:13:32 +00002536 Timeout for Flash set sector lock bit operation (in ms)
2537
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002538- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_UNLOCK_TOUT
wdenkdccbda02003-07-14 22:13:32 +00002539 Timeout for Flash clear lock bits operation (in ms)
2540
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002541- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_PROTECTION
wdenkdccbda02003-07-14 22:13:32 +00002542 If defined, hardware flash sectors protection is used
2543 instead of U-Boot software protection.
2544
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002545- CONFIG_SYS_DIRECT_FLASH_TFTP:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002546
2547 Enable TFTP transfers directly to flash memory;
2548 without this option such a download has to be
2549 performed in two steps: (1) download to RAM, and (2)
2550 copy from RAM to flash.
2551
2552 The two-step approach is usually more reliable, since
2553 you can check if the download worked before you erase
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02002554 the flash, but in some situations (when system RAM is
2555 too limited to allow for a temporary copy of the
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002556 downloaded image) this option may be very useful.
2557
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002558- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_CFI:
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +00002559 Define if the flash driver uses extra elements in the
wdenk2cefd152004-02-08 22:55:38 +00002560 common flash structure for storing flash geometry.
2561
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD8d94c232008-08-13 01:40:42 +02002562- CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_DRIVER
wdenk2cefd152004-02-08 22:55:38 +00002563 This option also enables the building of the cfi_flash driver
2564 in the drivers directory
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002565
Piotr Ziecik3e939e92008-11-17 15:57:58 +01002566- CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_MTD
2567 This option enables the building of the cfi_mtd driver
2568 in the drivers directory. The driver exports CFI flash
2569 to the MTD layer.
2570
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002571- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_USE_BUFFER_WRITE
Guennadi Liakhovetski183284f2008-04-03 13:36:02 +02002572 Use buffered writes to flash.
2573
2574- CONFIG_FLASH_SPANSION_S29WS_N
2575 s29ws-n MirrorBit flash has non-standard addresses for buffered
2576 write commands.
2577
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002578- CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_QUIET_TEST
Stefan Roesec443fe92005-11-22 13:20:42 +01002579 If this option is defined, the common CFI flash doesn't
2580 print it's warning upon not recognized FLASH banks. This
2581 is useful, if some of the configured banks are only
2582 optionally available.
2583
Jerry Van Barenaae73572008-03-08 13:48:01 -05002584- CONFIG_FLASH_SHOW_PROGRESS
2585 If defined (must be an integer), print out countdown
2586 digits and dots. Recommended value: 45 (9..1) for 80
2587 column displays, 15 (3..1) for 40 column displays.
2588
Stefan Roesed20cba52013-04-04 15:53:14 +02002589- CONFIG_FLASH_VERIFY
2590 If defined, the content of the flash (destination) is compared
2591 against the source after the write operation. An error message
2592 will be printed when the contents are not identical.
2593 Please note that this option is useless in nearly all cases,
2594 since such flash programming errors usually are detected earlier
2595 while unprotecting/erasing/programming. Please only enable
2596 this option if you really know what you are doing.
2597
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002598- CONFIG_SYS_RX_ETH_BUFFER:
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02002599 Defines the number of Ethernet receive buffers. On some
2600 Ethernet controllers it is recommended to set this value
stroese94ef1cf2003-06-05 15:39:44 +00002601 to 8 or even higher (EEPRO100 or 405 EMAC), since all
2602 buffers can be full shortly after enabling the interface
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02002603 on high Ethernet traffic.
stroese94ef1cf2003-06-05 15:39:44 +00002604 Defaults to 4 if not defined.
2605
Wolfgang Denk460a9ff2010-06-20 23:33:59 +02002606- CONFIG_ENV_MAX_ENTRIES
2607
Wolfgang Denk1136f692010-10-27 22:48:30 +02002608 Maximum number of entries in the hash table that is used
2609 internally to store the environment settings. The default
2610 setting is supposed to be generous and should work in most
2611 cases. This setting can be used to tune behaviour; see
2612 lib/hashtable.c for details.
Wolfgang Denk460a9ff2010-06-20 23:33:59 +02002613
Joe Hershberger71497d02012-12-11 22:16:31 -06002614- CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_DEFAULT
2615- CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC
Robert P. J. Day832d36e2013-09-16 07:15:45 -04002616 Enable validation of the values given to environment variables when
Joe Hershberger71497d02012-12-11 22:16:31 -06002617 calling env set. Variables can be restricted to only decimal,
2618 hexadecimal, or boolean. If CONFIG_CMD_NET is also defined,
2619 the variables can also be restricted to IP address or MAC address.
2620
2621 The format of the list is:
2622 type_attribute = [s|d|x|b|i|m]
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -08002623 access_attribute = [a|r|o|c]
2624 attributes = type_attribute[access_attribute]
Joe Hershberger71497d02012-12-11 22:16:31 -06002625 entry = variable_name[:attributes]
2626 list = entry[,list]
2627
2628 The type attributes are:
2629 s - String (default)
2630 d - Decimal
2631 x - Hexadecimal
2632 b - Boolean ([1yYtT|0nNfF])
2633 i - IP address
2634 m - MAC address
2635
Joe Hershberger6fe26c92012-12-11 22:16:34 -06002636 The access attributes are:
2637 a - Any (default)
2638 r - Read-only
2639 o - Write-once
2640 c - Change-default
2641
Joe Hershberger71497d02012-12-11 22:16:31 -06002642 - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_DEFAULT
2643 Define this to a list (string) to define the ".flags"
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -08002644 environment variable in the default or embedded environment.
Joe Hershberger71497d02012-12-11 22:16:31 -06002645
2646 - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC
2647 Define this to a list (string) to define validation that
2648 should be done if an entry is not found in the ".flags"
2649 environment variable. To override a setting in the static
2650 list, simply add an entry for the same variable name to the
2651 ".flags" variable.
2652
Joe Hershberger6db9fd42015-05-20 14:27:20 -05002653 If CONFIG_REGEX is defined, the variable_name above is evaluated as a
2654 regular expression. This allows multiple variables to define the same
2655 flags without explicitly listing them for each variable.
2656
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002657The following definitions that deal with the placement and management
2658of environment data (variable area); in general, we support the
2659following configurations:
2660
Mike Frysinger63b8f122011-07-08 10:44:25 +00002661- CONFIG_BUILD_ENVCRC:
2662
2663 Builds up envcrc with the target environment so that external utils
2664 may easily extract it and embed it in final U-Boot images.
2665
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002666BE CAREFUL! The first access to the environment happens quite early
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -08002667in U-Boot initialization (when we try to get the setting of for the
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02002668console baudrate). You *MUST* have mapped your NVRAM area then, or
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002669U-Boot will hang.
2670
2671Please note that even with NVRAM we still use a copy of the
2672environment in RAM: we could work on NVRAM directly, but we want to
2673keep settings there always unmodified except somebody uses "saveenv"
2674to save the current settings.
2675
Liu Gang85bcd732012-03-08 00:33:20 +00002676BE CAREFUL! For some special cases, the local device can not use
2677"saveenv" command. For example, the local device will get the
Liu Gang357bf5a2012-08-09 05:10:01 +00002678environment stored in a remote NOR flash by SRIO or PCIE link,
2679but it can not erase, write this NOR flash by SRIO or PCIE interface.
Liu Gang85bcd732012-03-08 00:33:20 +00002680
Guennadi Liakhovetskifad24442009-05-18 16:07:22 +02002681- CONFIG_NAND_ENV_DST
2682
2683 Defines address in RAM to which the nand_spl code should copy the
2684 environment. If redundant environment is used, it will be copied to
2685 CONFIG_NAND_ENV_DST + CONFIG_ENV_SIZE.
2686
Bruce Adleredecc942007-11-02 13:15:42 -07002687Please note that the environment is read-only until the monitor
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002688has been relocated to RAM and a RAM copy of the environment has been
Simon Glass64b723f2017-08-03 12:22:12 -06002689created; also, when using EEPROM you will have to use env_get_f()
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002690until then to read environment variables.
2691
wdenk8dba0502003-03-31 16:34:49 +00002692The environment is protected by a CRC32 checksum. Before the monitor
2693is relocated into RAM, as a result of a bad CRC you will be working
2694with the compiled-in default environment - *silently*!!! [This is
2695necessary, because the first environment variable we need is the
2696"baudrate" setting for the console - if we have a bad CRC, we don't
2697have any device yet where we could complain.]
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002698
2699Note: once the monitor has been relocated, then it will complain if
2700the default environment is used; a new CRC is computed as soon as you
wdenk8dba0502003-03-31 16:34:49 +00002701use the "saveenv" command to store a valid environment.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002702
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002703- CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_ECHO_LINK_DOWN:
wdenk9c53f402003-10-15 23:53:47 +00002704 Echo the inverted Ethernet link state to the fault LED.
wdenk49c3f672003-10-08 22:33:00 +00002705
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002706 Note: If this option is active, then CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_MII_ADDR
wdenk49c3f672003-10-08 22:33:00 +00002707 also needs to be defined.
2708
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002709- CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_MII_ADDR:
wdenk9c53f402003-10-15 23:53:47 +00002710 MII address of the PHY to check for the Ethernet link state.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002711
Ron Madriddfa028a2009-02-18 14:30:44 -08002712- CONFIG_NS16550_MIN_FUNCTIONS:
2713 Define this if you desire to only have use of the NS16550_init
2714 and NS16550_putc functions for the serial driver located at
2715 drivers/serial/ns16550.c. This option is useful for saving
2716 space for already greatly restricted images, including but not
2717 limited to NAND_SPL configurations.
2718
Simon Glass28a9e332012-11-30 13:01:18 +00002719- CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO
2720 Display information about the board that U-Boot is running on
2721 when U-Boot starts up. The board function checkboard() is called
2722 to do this.
2723
Simon Glasse8822012012-11-30 13:01:19 +00002724- CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO_LATE
2725 Similar to the previous option, but display this information
2726 later, once stdio is running and output goes to the LCD, if
2727 present.
2728
Sascha Silbe4b9c17c2013-08-11 16:40:43 +02002729- CONFIG_BOARD_SIZE_LIMIT:
2730 Maximum size of the U-Boot image. When defined, the
2731 build system checks that the actual size does not
2732 exceed it.
2733
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002734Low Level (hardware related) configuration options:
wdenkc8434db2003-03-26 06:55:25 +00002735---------------------------------------------------
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002736
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002737- CONFIG_SYS_CACHELINE_SIZE:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002738 Cache Line Size of the CPU.
2739
Timur Tabid8f341c2011-08-04 18:03:41 -05002740- CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT:
2741 Default (power-on reset) physical address of CCSR on Freescale
2742 PowerPC SOCs.
2743
2744- CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR:
2745 Virtual address of CCSR. On a 32-bit build, this is typically
2746 the same value as CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT.
2747
Timur Tabid8f341c2011-08-04 18:03:41 -05002748- CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS:
2749 Physical address of CCSR. CCSR can be relocated to a new
2750 physical address, if desired. In this case, this macro should
Wolfgang Denk092ae952011-10-26 10:21:21 +00002751 be set to that address. Otherwise, it should be set to the
Timur Tabid8f341c2011-08-04 18:03:41 -05002752 same value as CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT. For example, CCSR
2753 is typically relocated on 36-bit builds. It is recommended
2754 that this macro be defined via the _HIGH and _LOW macros:
2755
2756 #define CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS ((CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_HIGH
2757 * 1ull) << 32 | CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_LOW)
2758
2759- CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_HIGH:
Wolfgang Denkd590fb12011-10-07 09:58:21 +02002760 Bits 33-36 of CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS. This value is typically
2761 either 0 (32-bit build) or 0xF (36-bit build). This macro is
Timur Tabid8f341c2011-08-04 18:03:41 -05002762 used in assembly code, so it must not contain typecasts or
2763 integer size suffixes (e.g. "ULL").
2764
2765- CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_LOW:
2766 Lower 32-bits of CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS. This macro is
2767 used in assembly code, so it must not contain typecasts or
2768 integer size suffixes (e.g. "ULL").
2769
2770- CONFIG_SYS_CCSR_DO_NOT_RELOCATE:
2771 If this macro is defined, then CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS will be
2772 forced to a value that ensures that CCSR is not relocated.
2773
Macpaul Lind1e49942011-04-11 20:45:32 +00002774- CONFIG_IDE_AHB:
2775 Most IDE controllers were designed to be connected with PCI
2776 interface. Only few of them were designed for AHB interface.
2777 When software is doing ATA command and data transfer to
2778 IDE devices through IDE-AHB controller, some additional
2779 registers accessing to these kind of IDE-AHB controller
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -08002780 is required.
Macpaul Lind1e49942011-04-11 20:45:32 +00002781
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002782- CONFIG_SYS_IMMR: Physical address of the Internal Memory.
wdenk07d7e6b2004-12-16 21:44:03 +00002783 DO NOT CHANGE unless you know exactly what you're
Christophe Leroy069fa832017-07-06 10:23:22 +02002784 doing! (11-4) [MPC8xx systems only]
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002785
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002786- CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002787
wdenkeb20ad32003-09-05 23:19:14 +00002788 Start address of memory area that can be used for
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002789 initial data and stack; please note that this must be
2790 writable memory that is working WITHOUT special
2791 initialization, i. e. you CANNOT use normal RAM which
2792 will become available only after programming the
2793 memory controller and running certain initialization
2794 sequences.
2795
2796 U-Boot uses the following memory types:
Christophe Leroy069fa832017-07-06 10:23:22 +02002797 - MPC8xx: IMMR (internal memory of the CPU)
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002798
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002799- CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002800
2801 Offset of the initial data structure in the memory
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002802 area defined by CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR. Usually
2803 CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET is chosen such that the initial
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002804 data is located at the end of the available space
Wolfgang Denk1c2e98e2010-10-26 13:32:32 +02002805 (sometimes written as (CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_SIZE -
Simon Glass9a6ac8b2016-10-02 18:01:06 -06002806 GENERATED_GBL_DATA_SIZE), and the initial stack is just
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002807 below that area (growing from (CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR +
2808 CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET) downward.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002809
2810 Note:
2811 On the MPC824X (or other systems that use the data
2812 cache for initial memory) the address chosen for
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002813 CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR is basically arbitrary - it must
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002814 point to an otherwise UNUSED address space between
2815 the top of RAM and the start of the PCI space.
2816
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002817- CONFIG_SYS_SCCR: System Clock and reset Control Register (15-27)
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002818
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002819- CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_SDRAM:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002820 SDRAM timing
2821
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002822- CONFIG_SYS_MAMR_PTA:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002823 periodic timer for refresh
2824
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002825- FLASH_BASE0_PRELIM, FLASH_BASE1_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_REMAP_OR_AM,
2826 CONFIG_SYS_PRELIM_OR_AM, CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_FLASH, CONFIG_SYS_OR0_REMAP,
2827 CONFIG_SYS_OR0_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR0_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_OR1_REMAP, CONFIG_SYS_OR1_PRELIM,
2828 CONFIG_SYS_BR1_PRELIM:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002829 Memory Controller Definitions: BR0/1 and OR0/1 (FLASH)
2830
2831- SDRAM_BASE2_PRELIM, SDRAM_BASE3_PRELIM, SDRAM_MAX_SIZE,
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002832 CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_SDRAM, CONFIG_SYS_OR2_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR2_PRELIM,
2833 CONFIG_SYS_OR3_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR3_PRELIM:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00002834 Memory Controller Definitions: BR2/3 and OR2/3 (SDRAM)
2835
Andrew Sharp61d47ca2012-08-29 14:16:32 +00002836- CONFIG_PCI_ENUM_ONLY
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -08002837 Only scan through and get the devices on the buses.
Andrew Sharp61d47ca2012-08-29 14:16:32 +00002838 Don't do any setup work, presumably because someone or
2839 something has already done it, and we don't need to do it
2840 a second time. Useful for platforms that are pre-booted
2841 by coreboot or similar.
2842
Gabor Juhosb4458732013-05-30 07:06:12 +00002843- CONFIG_PCI_INDIRECT_BRIDGE:
2844 Enable support for indirect PCI bridges.
2845
Kumar Gala8975d7a2010-12-30 12:09:53 -06002846- CONFIG_SYS_SRIO:
2847 Chip has SRIO or not
2848
2849- CONFIG_SRIO1:
2850 Board has SRIO 1 port available
2851
2852- CONFIG_SRIO2:
2853 Board has SRIO 2 port available
2854
Liu Gang27afb9c2013-05-07 16:30:46 +08002855- CONFIG_SRIO_PCIE_BOOT_MASTER
2856 Board can support master function for Boot from SRIO and PCIE
2857
Kumar Gala8975d7a2010-12-30 12:09:53 -06002858- CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_VIRT:
2859 Virtual Address of SRIO port 'n' memory region
2860
Simon Glass970b61e2019-11-14 12:57:09 -07002861- CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_PHYxS:
Kumar Gala8975d7a2010-12-30 12:09:53 -06002862 Physical Address of SRIO port 'n' memory region
2863
2864- CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_SIZE:
2865 Size of SRIO port 'n' memory region
2866
Fabio Estevamf17e8782013-04-11 09:35:34 +00002867- CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BUSWIDTH_16BIT
2868 Defined to tell the NAND controller that the NAND chip is using
2869 a 16 bit bus.
2870 Not all NAND drivers use this symbol.
Fabio Estevam417052b2013-04-11 09:35:35 +00002871 Example of drivers that use it:
Miquel Raynal1f1ae152018-08-16 17:30:07 +02002872 - drivers/mtd/nand/raw/ndfc.c
2873 - drivers/mtd/nand/raw/mxc_nand.c
Alex Watermancd6aae32011-05-19 15:08:36 -04002874
2875- CONFIG_SYS_NDFC_EBC0_CFG
2876 Sets the EBC0_CFG register for the NDFC. If not defined
2877 a default value will be used.
2878
Ben Warren45657152006-09-07 16:50:54 -04002879- CONFIG_SPD_EEPROM
Wolfgang Denkb240aef2008-03-26 10:40:12 +01002880 Get DDR timing information from an I2C EEPROM. Common
2881 with pluggable memory modules such as SODIMMs
2882
Ben Warren45657152006-09-07 16:50:54 -04002883 SPD_EEPROM_ADDRESS
2884 I2C address of the SPD EEPROM
2885
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002886- CONFIG_SYS_SPD_BUS_NUM
Wolfgang Denkb240aef2008-03-26 10:40:12 +01002887 If SPD EEPROM is on an I2C bus other than the first
2888 one, specify here. Note that the value must resolve
2889 to something your driver can deal with.
Ben Warren45657152006-09-07 16:50:54 -04002890
York Sune73cc042011-06-07 09:42:16 +08002891- CONFIG_SYS_DDR_RAW_TIMING
2892 Get DDR timing information from other than SPD. Common with
2893 soldered DDR chips onboard without SPD. DDR raw timing
2894 parameters are extracted from datasheet and hard-coded into
2895 header files or board specific files.
2896
York Sunbd495cf2011-09-16 13:21:35 -07002897- CONFIG_FSL_DDR_INTERACTIVE
2898 Enable interactive DDR debugging. See doc/README.fsl-ddr.
2899
York Sun8ced0502015-01-06 13:18:55 -08002900- CONFIG_FSL_DDR_SYNC_REFRESH
2901 Enable sync of refresh for multiple controllers.
2902
York Sunb6a35f82015-03-19 09:30:28 -07002903- CONFIG_FSL_DDR_BIST
2904 Enable built-in memory test for Freescale DDR controllers.
2905
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02002906- CONFIG_SYS_83XX_DDR_USES_CS0
Wolfgang Denkb240aef2008-03-26 10:40:12 +01002907 Only for 83xx systems. If specified, then DDR should
2908 be configured using CS0 and CS1 instead of CS2 and CS3.
Timur Tabi054838e2006-10-31 18:44:42 -06002909
wdenk6203e402004-04-18 10:13:26 +00002910- CONFIG_RMII
2911 Enable RMII mode for all FECs.
2912 Note that this is a global option, we can't
2913 have one FEC in standard MII mode and another in RMII mode.
2914
wdenk20c98a62004-04-23 20:32:05 +00002915- CONFIG_CRC32_VERIFY
2916 Add a verify option to the crc32 command.
2917 The syntax is:
2918
2919 => crc32 -v <address> <count> <crc32>
2920
2921 Where address/count indicate a memory area
2922 and crc32 is the correct crc32 which the
2923 area should have.
2924
wdenk64519362004-07-11 17:40:54 +00002925- CONFIG_LOOPW
2926 Add the "loopw" memory command. This only takes effect if
Simon Glass92ffdee2017-08-04 16:34:27 -06002927 the memory commands are activated globally (CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY).
wdenk64519362004-07-11 17:40:54 +00002928
Joel Johnsondb5a97e2020-01-29 09:17:18 -07002929- CONFIG_CMD_MX_CYCLIC
stroesecc3af832004-12-16 18:46:55 +00002930 Add the "mdc" and "mwc" memory commands. These are cyclic
2931 "md/mw" commands.
2932 Examples:
2933
wdenk07d7e6b2004-12-16 21:44:03 +00002934 => mdc.b 10 4 500
stroesecc3af832004-12-16 18:46:55 +00002935 This command will print 4 bytes (10,11,12,13) each 500 ms.
2936
wdenk07d7e6b2004-12-16 21:44:03 +00002937 => mwc.l 100 12345678 10
stroesecc3af832004-12-16 18:46:55 +00002938 This command will write 12345678 to address 100 all 10 ms.
2939
wdenk07d7e6b2004-12-16 21:44:03 +00002940 This only takes effect if the memory commands are activated
Simon Glass92ffdee2017-08-04 16:34:27 -06002941 globally (CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY).
stroesecc3af832004-12-16 18:46:55 +00002942
wdenk3d3d99f2005-04-04 12:44:11 +00002943- CONFIG_SKIP_LOWLEVEL_INIT
Rick Chend7e6f922017-12-26 13:55:59 +08002944 [ARM, NDS32, MIPS, RISC-V only] If this variable is defined, then certain
Wolfgang Denk302141d2010-11-27 23:30:56 +01002945 low level initializations (like setting up the memory
2946 controller) are omitted and/or U-Boot does not
2947 relocate itself into RAM.
wdenk3d3d99f2005-04-04 12:44:11 +00002948
Wolfgang Denk302141d2010-11-27 23:30:56 +01002949 Normally this variable MUST NOT be defined. The only
2950 exception is when U-Boot is loaded (to RAM) by some
2951 other boot loader or by a debugger which performs
2952 these initializations itself.
wdenk3d3d99f2005-04-04 12:44:11 +00002953
Simon Glass90844072016-05-05 07:28:06 -06002954- CONFIG_SKIP_LOWLEVEL_INIT_ONLY
2955 [ARM926EJ-S only] This allows just the call to lowlevel_init()
yeongjun Kim7a203682016-07-20 22:56:12 +09002956 to be skipped. The normal CP15 init (such as enabling the
Simon Glass90844072016-05-05 07:28:06 -06002957 instruction cache) is still performed.
2958
Aneesh V552a3192011-07-13 05:11:07 +00002959- CONFIG_SPL_BUILD
Thomas Hebbfd37f242019-11-13 18:18:03 -08002960 Set when the currently-running compilation is for an artifact
2961 that will end up in the SPL (as opposed to the TPL or U-Boot
2962 proper). Code that needs stage-specific behavior should check
2963 this.
wdenk336b2bc2005-04-02 23:52:25 +00002964
Ying Zhang2d2e3b62013-08-16 15:16:15 +08002965- CONFIG_TPL_BUILD
Thomas Hebbfd37f242019-11-13 18:18:03 -08002966 Set when the currently-running compilation is for an artifact
2967 that will end up in the TPL (as opposed to the SPL or U-Boot
2968 proper). Code that needs stage-specific behavior should check
2969 this.
Ying Zhang2d2e3b62013-08-16 15:16:15 +08002970
Ying Zhang0d4f5442013-05-20 14:07:23 +08002971- CONFIG_SYS_MPC85XX_NO_RESETVEC
2972 Only for 85xx systems. If this variable is specified, the section
2973 .resetvec is not kept and the section .bootpg is placed in the
2974 previous 4k of the .text section.
2975
Simon Glass17dabf02013-02-24 17:33:14 +00002976- CONFIG_ARCH_MAP_SYSMEM
2977 Generally U-Boot (and in particular the md command) uses
2978 effective address. It is therefore not necessary to regard
2979 U-Boot address as virtual addresses that need to be translated
2980 to physical addresses. However, sandbox requires this, since
2981 it maintains its own little RAM buffer which contains all
2982 addressable memory. This option causes some memory accesses
2983 to be mapped through map_sysmem() / unmap_sysmem().
2984
Simon Glassbfb59802013-02-14 04:18:54 +00002985- CONFIG_X86_RESET_VECTOR
2986 If defined, the x86 reset vector code is included. This is not
2987 needed when U-Boot is running from Coreboot.
Gabe Black14f82462012-11-27 21:08:06 +00002988
Karicheri, Muralidharanc1dc61b2014-04-04 13:16:50 -04002989- CONFIG_SYS_NAND_NO_SUBPAGE_WRITE
2990 Option to disable subpage write in NAND driver
2991 driver that uses this:
Miquel Raynal1f1ae152018-08-16 17:30:07 +02002992 drivers/mtd/nand/raw/davinci_nand.c
Karicheri, Muralidharanc1dc61b2014-04-04 13:16:50 -04002993
Timur Tabi275f4bb2011-11-22 09:21:25 -06002994Freescale QE/FMAN Firmware Support:
2995-----------------------------------
2996
2997The Freescale QUICCEngine (QE) and Frame Manager (FMAN) both support the
2998loading of "firmware", which is encoded in the QE firmware binary format.
2999This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting, so macros
3000are used to identify the storage device (NOR flash, SPI, etc) and the address
3001within that device.
3002
Zhao Qiang83a90842014-03-21 16:21:44 +08003003- CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR
3004 The address in the storage device where the FMAN microcode is located. The
Tom Rinifa911f82019-05-12 07:59:12 -04003005 meaning of this address depends on which CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_xxx macro
Zhao Qiang83a90842014-03-21 16:21:44 +08003006 is also specified.
3007
3008- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_ADDR
3009 The address in the storage device where the QE microcode is located. The
Tom Rinifa911f82019-05-12 07:59:12 -04003010 meaning of this address depends on which CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_xxx macro
Timur Tabi275f4bb2011-11-22 09:21:25 -06003011 is also specified.
3012
3013- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_LENGTH
3014 The maximum possible size of the firmware. The firmware binary format
3015 has a field that specifies the actual size of the firmware, but it
3016 might not be possible to read any part of the firmware unless some
3017 local storage is allocated to hold the entire firmware first.
3018
3019- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_NOR
3020 Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in NOR flash, mapped as
3021 normal addressable memory via the LBC. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the
3022 virtual address in NOR flash.
3023
3024- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_NAND
3025 Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in NAND flash.
3026 CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the offset within NAND flash.
3027
3028- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_MMC
3029 Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located on the primary SD/MMC
3030 device. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the byte offset on that device.
3031
Liu Gang1e084582012-03-08 00:33:18 +00003032- CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_REMOTE
3033 Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in the remote (master)
3034 memory space. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is a virtual address which
Liu Gang357bf5a2012-08-09 05:10:01 +00003035 can be mapped from slave TLB->slave LAW->slave SRIO or PCIE outbound
3036 window->master inbound window->master LAW->the ucode address in
3037 master's memory space.
Timur Tabi275f4bb2011-11-22 09:21:25 -06003038
J. German Rivera8ff14b72014-06-23 15:15:55 -07003039Freescale Layerscape Management Complex Firmware Support:
3040---------------------------------------------------------
3041The Freescale Layerscape Management Complex (MC) supports the loading of
3042"firmware".
3043This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting, so macros
3044are used to identify the storage device (NOR flash, SPI, etc) and the address
3045within that device.
3046
3047- CONFIG_FSL_MC_ENET
3048 Enable the MC driver for Layerscape SoCs.
3049
Prabhakar Kushwaha853a9012015-06-02 10:55:52 +05303050Freescale Layerscape Debug Server Support:
3051-------------------------------------------
3052The Freescale Layerscape Debug Server Support supports the loading of
3053"Debug Server firmware" and triggering SP boot-rom.
3054This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting.
3055
York Sun928b6812015-12-07 11:08:58 -08003056- CONFIG_SYS_MC_RSV_MEM_ALIGN
3057 Define alignment of reserved memory MC requires
Prabhakar Kushwaha853a9012015-06-02 10:55:52 +05303058
Paul Kocialkowski7b917022015-07-26 18:48:15 +02003059Reproducible builds
3060-------------------
3061
3062In order to achieve reproducible builds, timestamps used in the U-Boot build
3063process have to be set to a fixed value.
3064
3065This is done using the SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH environment variable.
3066SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH is to be set on the build host's shell, not as a configuration
3067option for U-Boot or an environment variable in U-Boot.
3068
3069SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH should be set to a number of seconds since the epoch, in UTC.
3070
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003071Building the Software:
3072======================
3073
Wolfgang Denkb240aef2008-03-26 10:40:12 +01003074Building U-Boot has been tested in several native build environments
3075and in many different cross environments. Of course we cannot support
3076all possibly existing versions of cross development tools in all
3077(potentially obsolete) versions. In case of tool chain problems we
3078recommend to use the ELDK (see http://www.denx.de/wiki/DULG/ELDK)
3079which is extensively used to build and test U-Boot.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003080
Wolfgang Denkb240aef2008-03-26 10:40:12 +01003081If you are not using a native environment, it is assumed that you
3082have GNU cross compiling tools available in your path. In this case,
3083you must set the environment variable CROSS_COMPILE in your shell.
3084Note that no changes to the Makefile or any other source files are
3085necessary. For example using the ELDK on a 4xx CPU, please enter:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003086
Wolfgang Denkb240aef2008-03-26 10:40:12 +01003087 $ CROSS_COMPILE=ppc_4xx-
3088 $ export CROSS_COMPILE
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003089
Wolfgang Denkb240aef2008-03-26 10:40:12 +01003090U-Boot is intended to be simple to build. After installing the
3091sources you must configure U-Boot for one specific board type. This
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003092is done by typing:
3093
Holger Freyther7ba4e572014-08-04 09:26:05 +02003094 make NAME_defconfig
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003095
Holger Freyther7ba4e572014-08-04 09:26:05 +02003096where "NAME_defconfig" is the name of one of the existing configu-
Heinrich Schuchardtd6e07af2020-02-24 18:36:30 +01003097rations; see configs/*_defconfig for supported names.
wdenk2f0812d2003-10-08 22:45:44 +00003098
Heinrich Schuchardtd6e07af2020-02-24 18:36:30 +01003099Note: for some boards special configuration names may exist; check if
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003100 additional information is available from the board vendor; for
3101 instance, the TQM823L systems are available without (standard)
3102 or with LCD support. You can select such additional "features"
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02003103 when choosing the configuration, i. e.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003104
Holger Freyther7ba4e572014-08-04 09:26:05 +02003105 make TQM823L_defconfig
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003106 - will configure for a plain TQM823L, i. e. no LCD support
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003107
Holger Freyther7ba4e572014-08-04 09:26:05 +02003108 make TQM823L_LCD_defconfig
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003109 - will configure for a TQM823L with U-Boot console on LCD
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003110
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003111 etc.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003112
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003113
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003114Finally, type "make all", and you should get some working U-Boot
3115images ready for download to / installation on your system:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003116
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003117- "u-boot.bin" is a raw binary image
3118- "u-boot" is an image in ELF binary format
3119- "u-boot.srec" is in Motorola S-Record format
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003120
Marian Balakowiczefe063f2006-09-07 17:25:40 +02003121By default the build is performed locally and the objects are saved
3122in the source directory. One of the two methods can be used to change
3123this behavior and build U-Boot to some external directory:
3124
31251. Add O= to the make command line invocations:
3126
3127 make O=/tmp/build distclean
Holger Freyther7ba4e572014-08-04 09:26:05 +02003128 make O=/tmp/build NAME_defconfig
Marian Balakowiczefe063f2006-09-07 17:25:40 +02003129 make O=/tmp/build all
3130
Timo Ketolac8c67602014-11-06 14:39:05 +020031312. Set environment variable KBUILD_OUTPUT to point to the desired location:
Marian Balakowiczefe063f2006-09-07 17:25:40 +02003132
Timo Ketolac8c67602014-11-06 14:39:05 +02003133 export KBUILD_OUTPUT=/tmp/build
Marian Balakowiczefe063f2006-09-07 17:25:40 +02003134 make distclean
Holger Freyther7ba4e572014-08-04 09:26:05 +02003135 make NAME_defconfig
Marian Balakowiczefe063f2006-09-07 17:25:40 +02003136 make all
3137
Timo Ketolac8c67602014-11-06 14:39:05 +02003138Note that the command line "O=" setting overrides the KBUILD_OUTPUT environment
Marian Balakowiczefe063f2006-09-07 17:25:40 +02003139variable.
3140
Daniel Schwierzeck88484422018-01-26 16:31:04 +01003141User specific CPPFLAGS, AFLAGS and CFLAGS can be passed to the compiler by
3142setting the according environment variables KCPPFLAGS, KAFLAGS and KCFLAGS.
3143For example to treat all compiler warnings as errors:
3144
3145 make KCFLAGS=-Werror
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003146
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003147Please be aware that the Makefiles assume you are using GNU make, so
3148for instance on NetBSD you might need to use "gmake" instead of
3149native "make".
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003150
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003151
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003152If the system board that you have is not listed, then you will need
3153to port U-Boot to your hardware platform. To do this, follow these
3154steps:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003155
Phil Sutterc77b4882015-12-25 14:41:18 +010031561. Create a new directory to hold your board specific code. Add any
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003157 files you need. In your board directory, you will need at least
Phil Sutterc77b4882015-12-25 14:41:18 +01003158 the "Makefile" and a "<board>.c".
31592. Create a new configuration file "include/configs/<board>.h" for
3160 your board.
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +000031613. If you're porting U-Boot to a new CPU, then also create a new
3162 directory to hold your CPU specific code. Add any files you need.
Holger Freyther7ba4e572014-08-04 09:26:05 +020031634. Run "make <board>_defconfig" with your new name.
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +000031645. Type "make", and you should get a working "u-boot.srec" file
3165 to be installed on your target system.
31666. Debug and solve any problems that might arise.
3167 [Of course, this last step is much harder than it sounds.]
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003168
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003169
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003170Testing of U-Boot Modifications, Ports to New Hardware, etc.:
3171==============================================================
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003172
Wolfgang Denkb240aef2008-03-26 10:40:12 +01003173If you have modified U-Boot sources (for instance added a new board
3174or support for new devices, a new CPU, etc.) you are expected to
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003175provide feedback to the other developers. The feedback normally takes
Thomas Hebbfd37f242019-11-13 18:18:03 -08003176the form of a "patch", i.e. a context diff against a certain (latest
Wolfgang Denkb240aef2008-03-26 10:40:12 +01003177official or latest in the git repository) version of U-Boot sources.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003178
Wolfgang Denkb240aef2008-03-26 10:40:12 +01003179But before you submit such a patch, please verify that your modifi-
3180cation did not break existing code. At least make sure that *ALL* of
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003181the supported boards compile WITHOUT ANY compiler warnings. To do so,
Simon Glassdc27def2016-07-27 20:33:08 -06003182just run the buildman script (tools/buildman/buildman), which will
3183configure and build U-Boot for ALL supported system. Be warned, this
3184will take a while. Please see the buildman README, or run 'buildman -H'
3185for documentation.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003186
Marian Balakowiczefe063f2006-09-07 17:25:40 +02003187
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003188See also "U-Boot Porting Guide" below.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003189
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003190
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003191Monitor Commands - Overview:
3192============================
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003193
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003194go - start application at address 'addr'
3195run - run commands in an environment variable
3196bootm - boot application image from memory
3197bootp - boot image via network using BootP/TFTP protocol
Marek Vasutcf41a9b2012-03-14 21:52:45 +00003198bootz - boot zImage from memory
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003199tftpboot- boot image via network using TFTP protocol
3200 and env variables "ipaddr" and "serverip"
3201 (and eventually "gatewayip")
Simon Glass6a398d22011-10-24 18:00:07 +00003202tftpput - upload a file via network using TFTP protocol
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003203rarpboot- boot image via network using RARP/TFTP protocol
3204diskboot- boot from IDE devicebootd - boot default, i.e., run 'bootcmd'
3205loads - load S-Record file over serial line
3206loadb - load binary file over serial line (kermit mode)
3207md - memory display
3208mm - memory modify (auto-incrementing)
3209nm - memory modify (constant address)
3210mw - memory write (fill)
Simon Glass19038de2020-06-02 19:26:49 -06003211ms - memory search
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003212cp - memory copy
3213cmp - memory compare
3214crc32 - checksum calculation
Peter Tyser469cde42009-04-18 22:34:03 -05003215i2c - I2C sub-system
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003216sspi - SPI utility commands
3217base - print or set address offset
3218printenv- print environment variables
3219setenv - set environment variables
3220saveenv - save environment variables to persistent storage
3221protect - enable or disable FLASH write protection
3222erase - erase FLASH memory
3223flinfo - print FLASH memory information
Karl O. Pinc4baf03d2012-08-03 05:57:21 +00003224nand - NAND memory operations (see doc/README.nand)
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003225bdinfo - print Board Info structure
3226iminfo - print header information for application image
3227coninfo - print console devices and informations
3228ide - IDE sub-system
3229loop - infinite loop on address range
wdenk64519362004-07-11 17:40:54 +00003230loopw - infinite write loop on address range
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003231mtest - simple RAM test
3232icache - enable or disable instruction cache
3233dcache - enable or disable data cache
3234reset - Perform RESET of the CPU
3235echo - echo args to console
3236version - print monitor version
3237help - print online help
3238? - alias for 'help'
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003239
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003240
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003241Monitor Commands - Detailed Description:
3242========================================
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003243
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003244TODO.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003245
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003246For now: just type "help <command>".
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003247
3248
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003249Environment Variables:
3250======================
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003251
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003252U-Boot supports user configuration using Environment Variables which
3253can be made persistent by saving to Flash memory.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003254
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003255Environment Variables are set using "setenv", printed using
3256"printenv", and saved to Flash using "saveenv". Using "setenv"
3257without a value can be used to delete a variable from the
3258environment. As long as you don't save the environment you are
3259working with an in-memory copy. In case the Flash area containing the
3260environment is erased by accident, a default environment is provided.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003261
Wolfgang Denkb233bd72010-01-17 23:55:53 +01003262Some configuration options can be set using Environment Variables.
3263
3264List of environment variables (most likely not complete):
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003265
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003266 baudrate - see CONFIG_BAUDRATE
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003267
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003268 bootdelay - see CONFIG_BOOTDELAY
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003269
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003270 bootcmd - see CONFIG_BOOTCOMMAND
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003271
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003272 bootargs - Boot arguments when booting an RTOS image
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003273
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003274 bootfile - Name of the image to load with TFTP
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003275
Bartlomiej Siekac5648c82008-04-14 15:44:16 +02003276 bootm_low - Memory range available for image processing in the bootm
3277 command can be restricted. This variable is given as
3278 a hexadecimal number and defines lowest address allowed
3279 for use by the bootm command. See also "bootm_size"
3280 environment variable. Address defined by "bootm_low" is
3281 also the base of the initial memory mapping for the Linux
Grant Likely26396382011-03-28 09:58:43 +00003282 kernel -- see the description of CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ and
3283 bootm_mapsize.
3284
Wolfgang Denk092ae952011-10-26 10:21:21 +00003285 bootm_mapsize - Size of the initial memory mapping for the Linux kernel.
Grant Likely26396382011-03-28 09:58:43 +00003286 This variable is given as a hexadecimal number and it
3287 defines the size of the memory region starting at base
3288 address bootm_low that is accessible by the Linux kernel
3289 during early boot. If unset, CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ is used
3290 as the default value if it is defined, and bootm_size is
3291 used otherwise.
Bartlomiej Siekac5648c82008-04-14 15:44:16 +02003292
3293 bootm_size - Memory range available for image processing in the bootm
3294 command can be restricted. This variable is given as
3295 a hexadecimal number and defines the size of the region
3296 allowed for use by the bootm command. See also "bootm_low"
3297 environment variable.
3298
Simon Glassa8cab882019-07-20 20:51:17 -06003299 bootstopkeysha256, bootdelaykey, bootstopkey - See README.autoboot
3300
Bartlomiej Siekae273e9f2008-10-01 15:26:31 +02003301 updatefile - Location of the software update file on a TFTP server, used
3302 by the automatic software update feature. Please refer to
3303 documentation in doc/README.update for more details.
3304
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003305 autoload - if set to "no" (any string beginning with 'n'),
3306 "bootp" will just load perform a lookup of the
3307 configuration from the BOOTP server, but not try to
3308 load any image using TFTP
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003309
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003310 autostart - if set to "yes", an image loaded using the "bootp",
3311 "rarpboot", "tftpboot" or "diskboot" commands will
3312 be automatically started (by internally calling
3313 "bootm")
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003314
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003315 If set to "no", a standalone image passed to the
3316 "bootm" command will be copied to the load address
3317 (and eventually uncompressed), but NOT be started.
3318 This can be used to load and uncompress arbitrary
3319 data.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003320
David A. Longd558a4e2011-07-09 16:40:19 -04003321 fdt_high - if set this restricts the maximum address that the
3322 flattened device tree will be copied into upon boot.
Shawn Guo0ca9e982012-01-09 21:54:08 +00003323 For example, if you have a system with 1 GB memory
3324 at physical address 0x10000000, while Linux kernel
3325 only recognizes the first 704 MB as low memory, you
3326 may need to set fdt_high as 0x3C000000 to have the
3327 device tree blob be copied to the maximum address
3328 of the 704 MB low memory, so that Linux kernel can
3329 access it during the boot procedure.
3330
David A. Longd558a4e2011-07-09 16:40:19 -04003331 If this is set to the special value 0xFFFFFFFF then
3332 the fdt will not be copied at all on boot. For this
3333 to work it must reside in writable memory, have
3334 sufficient padding on the end of it for u-boot to
3335 add the information it needs into it, and the memory
3336 must be accessible by the kernel.
3337
Simon Glassdc6fa642011-10-24 19:15:34 +00003338 fdtcontroladdr- if set this is the address of the control flattened
3339 device tree used by U-Boot when CONFIG_OF_CONTROL is
3340 defined.
3341
wdenk0e2bd9c2004-06-06 21:51:03 +00003342 i2cfast - (PPC405GP|PPC405EP only)
3343 if set to 'y' configures Linux I2C driver for fast
3344 mode (400kHZ). This environment variable is used in
3345 initialization code. So, for changes to be effective
3346 it must be saved and board must be reset.
3347
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003348 initrd_high - restrict positioning of initrd images:
3349 If this variable is not set, initrd images will be
3350 copied to the highest possible address in RAM; this
3351 is usually what you want since it allows for
3352 maximum initrd size. If for some reason you want to
3353 make sure that the initrd image is loaded below the
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02003354 CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ limit, you can set this environment
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003355 variable to a value of "no" or "off" or "0".
3356 Alternatively, you can set it to a maximum upper
3357 address to use (U-Boot will still check that it
3358 does not overwrite the U-Boot stack and data).
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003359
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003360 For instance, when you have a system with 16 MB
3361 RAM, and want to reserve 4 MB from use by Linux,
3362 you can do this by adding "mem=12M" to the value of
3363 the "bootargs" variable. However, now you must make
3364 sure that the initrd image is placed in the first
3365 12 MB as well - this can be done with
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003366
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003367 setenv initrd_high 00c00000
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003368
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003369 If you set initrd_high to 0xFFFFFFFF, this is an
3370 indication to U-Boot that all addresses are legal
3371 for the Linux kernel, including addresses in flash
3372 memory. In this case U-Boot will NOT COPY the
3373 ramdisk at all. This may be useful to reduce the
3374 boot time on your system, but requires that this
3375 feature is supported by your Linux kernel.
wdenk3f9ab982003-04-12 23:38:12 +00003376
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003377 ipaddr - IP address; needed for tftpboot command
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003378
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003379 loadaddr - Default load address for commands like "bootp",
3380 "rarpboot", "tftpboot", "loadb" or "diskboot"
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003381
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003382 loads_echo - see CONFIG_LOADS_ECHO
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003383
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003384 serverip - TFTP server IP address; needed for tftpboot command
wdenk6f770ed2003-05-23 23:18:21 +00003385
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003386 bootretry - see CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003387
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003388 bootdelaykey - see CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_DELAY_STR
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003389
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003390 bootstopkey - see CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_STOP_STR
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003391
Mike Frysingera23230c2011-10-02 10:01:27 +00003392 ethprime - controls which interface is used first.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003393
Mike Frysingera23230c2011-10-02 10:01:27 +00003394 ethact - controls which interface is currently active.
3395 For example you can do the following
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003396
Heiko Schocherc5e84052010-07-20 17:45:02 +02003397 => setenv ethact FEC
3398 => ping 192.168.0.1 # traffic sent on FEC
3399 => setenv ethact SCC
3400 => ping 10.0.0.1 # traffic sent on SCC
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003401
Matthias Fuchs204f0ec2008-01-17 07:45:05 +01003402 ethrotate - When set to "no" U-Boot does not go through all
3403 available network interfaces.
3404 It just stays at the currently selected interface.
3405
Wolfgang Denkb233bd72010-01-17 23:55:53 +01003406 netretry - When set to "no" each network operation will
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003407 either succeed or fail without retrying.
3408 When set to "once" the network operation will
3409 fail when all the available network interfaces
3410 are tried once without success.
3411 Useful on scripts which control the retry operation
3412 themselves.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003413
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD1948d6c2009-01-31 09:53:39 +01003414 npe_ucode - set load address for the NPE microcode
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARDd2164ef2008-01-07 08:41:34 +01003415
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -08003416 silent_linux - If set then Linux will be told to boot silently, by
Simon Glass5db3f932013-07-16 20:10:00 -07003417 changing the console to be empty. If "yes" it will be
3418 made silent. If "no" it will not be made silent. If
3419 unset, then it will be made silent if the U-Boot console
3420 is silent.
3421
Albert ARIBAUD \(3ADEV\)83006852015-10-12 00:02:57 +02003422 tftpsrcp - If this is set, the value is used for TFTP's
Wolfgang Denke3cfce52005-09-24 22:37:32 +02003423 UDP source port.
3424
Albert ARIBAUD \(3ADEV\)83006852015-10-12 00:02:57 +02003425 tftpdstp - If this is set, the value is used for TFTP's UDP
Wolfgang Denk227b5192005-09-24 23:25:46 +02003426 destination port instead of the Well Know Port 69.
3427
Wolfgang Denkb233bd72010-01-17 23:55:53 +01003428 tftpblocksize - Block size to use for TFTP transfers; if not set,
3429 we use the TFTP server's default block size
3430
3431 tftptimeout - Retransmission timeout for TFTP packets (in milli-
3432 seconds, minimum value is 1000 = 1 second). Defines
3433 when a packet is considered to be lost so it has to
3434 be retransmitted. The default is 5000 = 5 seconds.
3435 Lowering this value may make downloads succeed
3436 faster in networks with high packet loss rates or
3437 with unreliable TFTP servers.
3438
Albert ARIBAUD \(3ADEV\)83006852015-10-12 00:02:57 +02003439 tftptimeoutcountmax - maximum count of TFTP timeouts (no
3440 unit, minimum value = 0). Defines how many timeouts
3441 can happen during a single file transfer before that
3442 transfer is aborted. The default is 10, and 0 means
3443 'no timeouts allowed'. Increasing this value may help
3444 downloads succeed with high packet loss rates, or with
3445 unreliable TFTP servers or client hardware.
3446
Wolfgang Denkb233bd72010-01-17 23:55:53 +01003447 vlan - When set to a value < 4095 the traffic over
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02003448 Ethernet is encapsulated/received over 802.1q
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003449 VLAN tagged frames.
wdenk145d2c12004-04-15 21:48:45 +00003450
Alexandre Messier15971322016-02-01 17:08:57 -05003451 bootpretryperiod - Period during which BOOTP/DHCP sends retries.
3452 Unsigned value, in milliseconds. If not set, the period will
3453 be either the default (28000), or a value based on
3454 CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT, if defined. This value has
3455 precedence over the valu based on CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT.
3456
Simon Glass19038de2020-06-02 19:26:49 -06003457 memmatches - Number of matches found by the last 'ms' command, in hex
3458
3459 memaddr - Address of the last match found by the 'ms' command, in hex,
3460 or 0 if none
3461
3462 mempos - Index position of the last match found by the 'ms' command,
3463 in units of the size (.b, .w, .l) of the search
3464
3465
Jason Hobbse3fe08e2011-08-31 05:37:28 +00003466The following image location variables contain the location of images
3467used in booting. The "Image" column gives the role of the image and is
3468not an environment variable name. The other columns are environment
3469variable names. "File Name" gives the name of the file on a TFTP
3470server, "RAM Address" gives the location in RAM the image will be
3471loaded to, and "Flash Location" gives the image's address in NOR
3472flash or offset in NAND flash.
3473
3474*Note* - these variables don't have to be defined for all boards, some
Fabio Estevambb7d4972015-04-25 18:53:10 -03003475boards currently use other variables for these purposes, and some
Jason Hobbse3fe08e2011-08-31 05:37:28 +00003476boards use these variables for other purposes.
3477
Wolfgang Denk092ae952011-10-26 10:21:21 +00003478Image File Name RAM Address Flash Location
3479----- --------- ----------- --------------
3480u-boot u-boot u-boot_addr_r u-boot_addr
3481Linux kernel bootfile kernel_addr_r kernel_addr
3482device tree blob fdtfile fdt_addr_r fdt_addr
3483ramdisk ramdiskfile ramdisk_addr_r ramdisk_addr
Jason Hobbse3fe08e2011-08-31 05:37:28 +00003484
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003485The following environment variables may be used and automatically
3486updated by the network boot commands ("bootp" and "rarpboot"),
3487depending the information provided by your boot server:
wdenk145d2c12004-04-15 21:48:45 +00003488
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003489 bootfile - see above
3490 dnsip - IP address of your Domain Name Server
3491 dnsip2 - IP address of your secondary Domain Name Server
3492 gatewayip - IP address of the Gateway (Router) to use
3493 hostname - Target hostname
3494 ipaddr - see above
3495 netmask - Subnet Mask
3496 rootpath - Pathname of the root filesystem on the NFS server
3497 serverip - see above
wdenk145d2c12004-04-15 21:48:45 +00003498
wdenk145d2c12004-04-15 21:48:45 +00003499
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003500There are two special Environment Variables:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003501
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003502 serial# - contains hardware identification information such
3503 as type string and/or serial number
3504 ethaddr - Ethernet address
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003505
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003506These variables can be set only once (usually during manufacturing of
3507the board). U-Boot refuses to delete or overwrite these variables
3508once they have been set once.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003509
3510
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003511Further special Environment Variables:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003512
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003513 ver - Contains the U-Boot version string as printed
3514 with the "version" command. This variable is
3515 readonly (see CONFIG_VERSION_VARIABLE).
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003516
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003517
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003518Please note that changes to some configuration parameters may take
3519only effect after the next boot (yes, that's just like Windoze :-).
stroeseb9c17c52003-04-04 15:53:41 +00003520
stroeseb9c17c52003-04-04 15:53:41 +00003521
Joe Hershberger60fd3ad2012-12-11 22:16:24 -06003522Callback functions for environment variables:
3523---------------------------------------------
3524
3525For some environment variables, the behavior of u-boot needs to change
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -08003526when their values are changed. This functionality allows functions to
Joe Hershberger60fd3ad2012-12-11 22:16:24 -06003527be associated with arbitrary variables. On creation, overwrite, or
3528deletion, the callback will provide the opportunity for some side
3529effect to happen or for the change to be rejected.
3530
3531The callbacks are named and associated with a function using the
3532U_BOOT_ENV_CALLBACK macro in your board or driver code.
3533
3534These callbacks are associated with variables in one of two ways. The
3535static list can be added to by defining CONFIG_ENV_CALLBACK_LIST_STATIC
3536in the board configuration to a string that defines a list of
3537associations. The list must be in the following format:
3538
3539 entry = variable_name[:callback_name]
3540 list = entry[,list]
3541
3542If the callback name is not specified, then the callback is deleted.
3543Spaces are also allowed anywhere in the list.
3544
3545Callbacks can also be associated by defining the ".callbacks" variable
3546with the same list format above. Any association in ".callbacks" will
3547override any association in the static list. You can define
3548CONFIG_ENV_CALLBACK_LIST_DEFAULT to a list (string) to define the
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -08003549".callbacks" environment variable in the default or embedded environment.
Joe Hershberger60fd3ad2012-12-11 22:16:24 -06003550
Joe Hershberger6db9fd42015-05-20 14:27:20 -05003551If CONFIG_REGEX is defined, the variable_name above is evaluated as a
3552regular expression. This allows multiple variables to be connected to
3553the same callback without explicitly listing them all out.
3554
Heinrich Schuchardtc141fa52018-07-29 11:08:14 +02003555The signature of the callback functions is:
3556
3557 int callback(const char *name, const char *value, enum env_op op, int flags)
3558
3559* name - changed environment variable
3560* value - new value of the environment variable
3561* op - operation (create, overwrite, or delete)
3562* flags - attributes of the environment variable change, see flags H_* in
3563 include/search.h
3564
3565The return value is 0 if the variable change is accepted and 1 otherwise.
Joe Hershberger60fd3ad2012-12-11 22:16:24 -06003566
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003567Command Line Parsing:
3568=====================
stroeseb9c17c52003-04-04 15:53:41 +00003569
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003570There are two different command line parsers available with U-Boot:
3571the old "simple" one, and the much more powerful "hush" shell:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003572
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003573Old, simple command line parser:
3574--------------------------------
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003575
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003576- supports environment variables (through setenv / saveenv commands)
3577- several commands on one line, separated by ';'
Wolfgang Denk86eb3b72005-11-20 21:40:11 +01003578- variable substitution using "... ${name} ..." syntax
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003579- special characters ('$', ';') can be escaped by prefixing with '\',
3580 for example:
Wolfgang Denk86eb3b72005-11-20 21:40:11 +01003581 setenv bootcmd bootm \${address}
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003582- You can also escape text by enclosing in single apostrophes, for example:
3583 setenv addip 'setenv bootargs $bootargs ip=$ipaddr:$serverip:$gatewayip:$netmask:$hostname::off'
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003584
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003585Hush shell:
3586-----------
wdenkf4688a22003-05-28 08:06:31 +00003587
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003588- similar to Bourne shell, with control structures like
3589 if...then...else...fi, for...do...done; while...do...done,
3590 until...do...done, ...
3591- supports environment ("global") variables (through setenv / saveenv
3592 commands) and local shell variables (through standard shell syntax
3593 "name=value"); only environment variables can be used with "run"
3594 command
wdenkf4688a22003-05-28 08:06:31 +00003595
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003596General rules:
3597--------------
wdenkf4688a22003-05-28 08:06:31 +00003598
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003599(1) If a command line (or an environment variable executed by a "run"
3600 command) contains several commands separated by semicolon, and
3601 one of these commands fails, then the remaining commands will be
3602 executed anyway.
wdenkf4688a22003-05-28 08:06:31 +00003603
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003604(2) If you execute several variables with one call to run (i. e.
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02003605 calling run with a list of variables as arguments), any failing
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003606 command will cause "run" to terminate, i. e. the remaining
3607 variables are not executed.
wdenkf4688a22003-05-28 08:06:31 +00003608
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003609Note for Redundant Ethernet Interfaces:
3610=======================================
wdenkf4688a22003-05-28 08:06:31 +00003611
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02003612Some boards come with redundant Ethernet interfaces; U-Boot supports
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003613such configurations and is capable of automatic selection of a
3614"working" interface when needed. MAC assignment works as follows:
wdenkf4688a22003-05-28 08:06:31 +00003615
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003616Network interfaces are numbered eth0, eth1, eth2, ... Corresponding
3617MAC addresses can be stored in the environment as "ethaddr" (=>eth0),
3618"eth1addr" (=>eth1), "eth2addr", ...
wdenkf4688a22003-05-28 08:06:31 +00003619
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003620If the network interface stores some valid MAC address (for instance
3621in SROM), this is used as default address if there is NO correspon-
3622ding setting in the environment; if the corresponding environment
3623variable is set, this overrides the settings in the card; that means:
wdenkf4688a22003-05-28 08:06:31 +00003624
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003625o If the SROM has a valid MAC address, and there is no address in the
3626 environment, the SROM's address is used.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003627
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003628o If there is no valid address in the SROM, and a definition in the
3629 environment exists, then the value from the environment variable is
3630 used.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003631
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003632o If both the SROM and the environment contain a MAC address, and
3633 both addresses are the same, this MAC address is used.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003634
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003635o If both the SROM and the environment contain a MAC address, and the
3636 addresses differ, the value from the environment is used and a
3637 warning is printed.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003638
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003639o If neither SROM nor the environment contain a MAC address, an error
Joe Hershberger2dc2b5d2015-05-04 14:55:13 -05003640 is raised. If CONFIG_NET_RANDOM_ETHADDR is defined, then in this case
3641 a random, locally-assigned MAC is used.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003642
Ben Warren6db991a2010-04-26 11:11:46 -07003643If Ethernet drivers implement the 'write_hwaddr' function, valid MAC addresses
Wolfgang Denk092ae952011-10-26 10:21:21 +00003644will be programmed into hardware as part of the initialization process. This
Ben Warren6db991a2010-04-26 11:11:46 -07003645may be skipped by setting the appropriate 'ethmacskip' environment variable.
3646The naming convention is as follows:
3647"ethmacskip" (=>eth0), "eth1macskip" (=>eth1) etc.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003648
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003649Image Formats:
3650==============
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003651
Marian Balakowicz18710b82008-03-12 12:13:13 +01003652U-Boot is capable of booting (and performing other auxiliary operations on)
3653images in two formats:
3654
3655New uImage format (FIT)
3656-----------------------
3657
3658Flexible and powerful format based on Flattened Image Tree -- FIT (similar
3659to Flattened Device Tree). It allows the use of images with multiple
3660components (several kernels, ramdisks, etc.), with contents protected by
3661SHA1, MD5 or CRC32. More details are found in the doc/uImage.FIT directory.
3662
3663
3664Old uImage format
3665-----------------
3666
3667Old image format is based on binary files which can be basically anything,
3668preceded by a special header; see the definitions in include/image.h for
3669details; basically, the header defines the following image properties:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003670
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003671* Target Operating System (Provisions for OpenBSD, NetBSD, FreeBSD,
3672 4.4BSD, Linux, SVR4, Esix, Solaris, Irix, SCO, Dell, NCR, VxWorks,
Peter Tyser56b8dd12008-09-08 14:56:49 -05003673 LynxOS, pSOS, QNX, RTEMS, INTEGRITY;
3674 Currently supported: Linux, NetBSD, VxWorks, QNX, RTEMS, LynxOS,
3675 INTEGRITY).
Andy Shevchenko8cb5cdd2017-07-05 16:25:22 +03003676* Target CPU Architecture (Provisions for Alpha, ARM, Intel x86,
Macpaul Lin1cac36e2011-10-19 20:41:11 +00003677 IA64, MIPS, NDS32, Nios II, PowerPC, IBM S390, SuperH, Sparc, Sparc 64 Bit;
Andy Shevchenko8cb5cdd2017-07-05 16:25:22 +03003678 Currently supported: ARM, Intel x86, MIPS, NDS32, Nios II, PowerPC).
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003679* Compression Type (uncompressed, gzip, bzip2)
3680* Load Address
3681* Entry Point
3682* Image Name
3683* Image Timestamp
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003684
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003685The header is marked by a special Magic Number, and both the header
3686and the data portions of the image are secured against corruption by
3687CRC32 checksums.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003688
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003689
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003690Linux Support:
3691==============
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003692
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003693Although U-Boot should support any OS or standalone application
3694easily, the main focus has always been on Linux during the design of
3695U-Boot.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003696
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003697U-Boot includes many features that so far have been part of some
3698special "boot loader" code within the Linux kernel. Also, any
3699"initrd" images to be used are no longer part of one big Linux image;
3700instead, kernel and "initrd" are separate images. This implementation
3701serves several purposes:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003702
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003703- the same features can be used for other OS or standalone
3704 applications (for instance: using compressed images to reduce the
3705 Flash memory footprint)
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003706
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003707- it becomes much easier to port new Linux kernel versions because
3708 lots of low-level, hardware dependent stuff are done by U-Boot
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003709
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003710- the same Linux kernel image can now be used with different "initrd"
3711 images; of course this also means that different kernel images can
3712 be run with the same "initrd". This makes testing easier (you don't
3713 have to build a new "zImage.initrd" Linux image when you just
3714 change a file in your "initrd"). Also, a field-upgrade of the
3715 software is easier now.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003716
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003717
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003718Linux HOWTO:
3719============
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003720
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003721Porting Linux to U-Boot based systems:
3722---------------------------------------
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003723
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003724U-Boot cannot save you from doing all the necessary modifications to
3725configure the Linux device drivers for use with your target hardware
3726(no, we don't intend to provide a full virtual machine interface to
3727Linux :-).
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003728
Stefan Roese88fbf932010-04-15 16:07:28 +02003729But now you can ignore ALL boot loader code (in arch/powerpc/mbxboot).
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003730
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003731Just make sure your machine specific header file (for instance
3732include/asm-ppc/tqm8xx.h) includes the same definition of the Board
Markus Heidelberg47167572008-09-07 20:18:27 +02003733Information structure as we define in include/asm-<arch>/u-boot.h,
3734and make sure that your definition of IMAP_ADDR uses the same value
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02003735as your U-Boot configuration in CONFIG_SYS_IMMR.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003736
Simon Glassd097e592014-06-11 23:29:46 -06003737Note that U-Boot now has a driver model, a unified model for drivers.
3738If you are adding a new driver, plumb it into driver model. If there
3739is no uclass available, you are encouraged to create one. See
3740doc/driver-model.
3741
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003742
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003743Configuring the Linux kernel:
3744-----------------------------
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003745
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003746No specific requirements for U-Boot. Make sure you have some root
3747device (initial ramdisk, NFS) for your target system.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003748
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003749
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003750Building a Linux Image:
3751-----------------------
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003752
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003753With U-Boot, "normal" build targets like "zImage" or "bzImage" are
3754not used. If you use recent kernel source, a new build target
3755"uImage" will exist which automatically builds an image usable by
3756U-Boot. Most older kernels also have support for a "pImage" target,
3757which was introduced for our predecessor project PPCBoot and uses a
3758100% compatible format.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003759
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003760Example:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003761
Holger Freyther7ba4e572014-08-04 09:26:05 +02003762 make TQM850L_defconfig
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003763 make oldconfig
3764 make dep
3765 make uImage
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003766
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003767The "uImage" build target uses a special tool (in 'tools/mkimage') to
3768encapsulate a compressed Linux kernel image with header information,
3769CRC32 checksum etc. for use with U-Boot. This is what we are doing:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003770
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003771* build a standard "vmlinux" kernel image (in ELF binary format):
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003772
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003773* convert the kernel into a raw binary image:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003774
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003775 ${CROSS_COMPILE}-objcopy -O binary \
3776 -R .note -R .comment \
3777 -S vmlinux linux.bin
wdenk24ee89b2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00003778
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003779* compress the binary image:
wdenk24ee89b2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00003780
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003781 gzip -9 linux.bin
wdenk24ee89b2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00003782
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003783* package compressed binary image for U-Boot:
wdenk24ee89b2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00003784
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003785 mkimage -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C gzip \
3786 -a 0 -e 0 -n "Linux Kernel Image" \
3787 -d linux.bin.gz uImage
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003788
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003789
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003790The "mkimage" tool can also be used to create ramdisk images for use
3791with U-Boot, either separated from the Linux kernel image, or
3792combined into one file. "mkimage" encapsulates the images with a 64
3793byte header containing information about target architecture,
3794operating system, image type, compression method, entry points, time
3795stamp, CRC32 checksums, etc.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003796
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003797"mkimage" can be called in two ways: to verify existing images and
3798print the header information, or to build new images.
wdenk24ee89b2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00003799
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003800In the first form (with "-l" option) mkimage lists the information
3801contained in the header of an existing U-Boot image; this includes
3802checksum verification:
wdenk24ee89b2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00003803
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003804 tools/mkimage -l image
3805 -l ==> list image header information
wdenk24ee89b2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00003806
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003807The second form (with "-d" option) is used to build a U-Boot image
3808from a "data file" which is used as image payload:
wdenk24ee89b2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00003809
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003810 tools/mkimage -A arch -O os -T type -C comp -a addr -e ep \
3811 -n name -d data_file image
3812 -A ==> set architecture to 'arch'
3813 -O ==> set operating system to 'os'
3814 -T ==> set image type to 'type'
3815 -C ==> set compression type 'comp'
3816 -a ==> set load address to 'addr' (hex)
3817 -e ==> set entry point to 'ep' (hex)
3818 -n ==> set image name to 'name'
3819 -d ==> use image data from 'datafile'
wdenk24ee89b2002-11-03 17:56:27 +00003820
wdenkcd914452004-05-29 16:53:29 +00003821Right now, all Linux kernels for PowerPC systems use the same load
3822address (0x00000000), but the entry point address depends on the
3823kernel version:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003824
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003825- 2.2.x kernels have the entry point at 0x0000000C,
3826- 2.3.x and later kernels have the entry point at 0x00000000.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003827
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003828So a typical call to build a U-Boot image would read:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003829
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003830 -> tools/mkimage -n '2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L' \
3831 > -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C gzip -a 0 -e 0 \
Stefan Roese88fbf932010-04-15 16:07:28 +02003832 > -d /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux.gz \
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003833 > examples/uImage.TQM850L
3834 Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L
3835 Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000
3836 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
3837 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327.86 kB = 0.32 MB
3838 Load Address: 0x00000000
3839 Entry Point: 0x00000000
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003840
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003841To verify the contents of the image (or check for corruption):
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003842
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003843 -> tools/mkimage -l examples/uImage.TQM850L
3844 Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L
3845 Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000
3846 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
3847 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327.86 kB = 0.32 MB
3848 Load Address: 0x00000000
3849 Entry Point: 0x00000000
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003850
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003851NOTE: for embedded systems where boot time is critical you can trade
3852speed for memory and install an UNCOMPRESSED image instead: this
3853needs more space in Flash, but boots much faster since it does not
3854need to be uncompressed:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003855
Stefan Roese88fbf932010-04-15 16:07:28 +02003856 -> gunzip /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux.gz
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003857 -> tools/mkimage -n '2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L' \
3858 > -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C none -a 0 -e 0 \
Stefan Roese88fbf932010-04-15 16:07:28 +02003859 > -d /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux \
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003860 > examples/uImage.TQM850L-uncompressed
3861 Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L
3862 Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000
3863 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (uncompressed)
3864 Data Size: 792160 Bytes = 773.59 kB = 0.76 MB
3865 Load Address: 0x00000000
3866 Entry Point: 0x00000000
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003867
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003868
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003869Similar you can build U-Boot images from a 'ramdisk.image.gz' file
3870when your kernel is intended to use an initial ramdisk:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003871
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003872 -> tools/mkimage -n 'Simple Ramdisk Image' \
3873 > -A ppc -O linux -T ramdisk -C gzip \
3874 > -d /LinuxPPC/images/SIMPLE-ramdisk.image.gz examples/simple-initrd
3875 Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image
3876 Created: Wed Jan 12 14:01:50 2000
3877 Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed)
3878 Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553.25 kB = 0.54 MB
3879 Load Address: 0x00000000
3880 Entry Point: 0x00000000
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003881
Guilherme Maciel Ferreira51553812013-12-01 12:43:11 -07003882The "dumpimage" is a tool to disassemble images built by mkimage. Its "-i"
3883option performs the converse operation of the mkimage's second form (the "-d"
3884option). Given an image built by mkimage, the dumpimage extracts a "data file"
3885from the image:
3886
Guilherme Maciel Ferreira40bf5632015-01-15 02:54:40 -02003887 tools/dumpimage -i image -T type -p position data_file
3888 -i ==> extract from the 'image' a specific 'data_file'
3889 -T ==> set image type to 'type'
3890 -p ==> 'position' (starting at 0) of the 'data_file' inside the 'image'
Guilherme Maciel Ferreira51553812013-12-01 12:43:11 -07003891
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003892
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003893Installing a Linux Image:
3894-------------------------
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003895
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003896To downloading a U-Boot image over the serial (console) interface,
3897you must convert the image to S-Record format:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003898
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003899 objcopy -I binary -O srec examples/image examples/image.srec
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003900
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003901The 'objcopy' does not understand the information in the U-Boot
3902image header, so the resulting S-Record file will be relative to
3903address 0x00000000. To load it to a given address, you need to
3904specify the target address as 'offset' parameter with the 'loads'
3905command.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003906
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003907Example: install the image to address 0x40100000 (which on the
3908TQM8xxL is in the first Flash bank):
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003909
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003910 => erase 40100000 401FFFFF
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003911
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003912 .......... done
3913 Erased 8 sectors
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003914
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003915 => loads 40100000
3916 ## Ready for S-Record download ...
3917 ~>examples/image.srec
3918 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ...
3919 ...
3920 15989 15990 15991 15992
3921 [file transfer complete]
3922 [connected]
3923 ## Start Addr = 0x00000000
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003924
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003925
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003926You can check the success of the download using the 'iminfo' command;
Wolfgang Denkb240aef2008-03-26 10:40:12 +01003927this includes a checksum verification so you can be sure no data
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003928corruption happened:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003929
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003930 => imi 40100000
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003931
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003932 ## Checking Image at 40100000 ...
3933 Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L
3934 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
3935 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB
3936 Load Address: 00000000
3937 Entry Point: 0000000c
3938 Verifying Checksum ... OK
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003939
3940
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003941Boot Linux:
3942-----------
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003943
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003944The "bootm" command is used to boot an application that is stored in
3945memory (RAM or Flash). In case of a Linux kernel image, the contents
3946of the "bootargs" environment variable is passed to the kernel as
3947parameters. You can check and modify this variable using the
3948"printenv" and "setenv" commands:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003949
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003950
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003951 => printenv bootargs
3952 bootargs=root=/dev/ram
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003953
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003954 => setenv bootargs root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003955
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003956 => printenv bootargs
3957 bootargs=root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003958
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003959 => bootm 40020000
3960 ## Booting Linux kernel at 40020000 ...
3961 Image Name: 2.2.13 for NFS on TQM850L
3962 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
3963 Data Size: 381681 Bytes = 372 kB = 0 MB
3964 Load Address: 00000000
3965 Entry Point: 0000000c
3966 Verifying Checksum ... OK
3967 Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK
3968 Linux version 2.2.13 (wd@denx.local.net) (gcc version 2.95.2 19991024 (release)) #1 Wed Jul 19 02:35:17 MEST 2000
3969 Boot arguments: root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2
3970 time_init: decrementer frequency = 187500000/60
3971 Calibrating delay loop... 49.77 BogoMIPS
3972 Memory: 15208k available (700k kernel code, 444k data, 32k init) [c0000000,c1000000]
3973 ...
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003974
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02003975If you want to boot a Linux kernel with initial RAM disk, you pass
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003976the memory addresses of both the kernel and the initrd image (PPBCOOT
3977format!) to the "bootm" command:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003978
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003979 => imi 40100000 40200000
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003980
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003981 ## Checking Image at 40100000 ...
3982 Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L
3983 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
3984 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB
3985 Load Address: 00000000
3986 Entry Point: 0000000c
3987 Verifying Checksum ... OK
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003988
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003989 ## Checking Image at 40200000 ...
3990 Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image
3991 Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed)
3992 Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553 kB = 0 MB
3993 Load Address: 00000000
3994 Entry Point: 00000000
3995 Verifying Checksum ... OK
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00003996
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00003997 => bootm 40100000 40200000
3998 ## Booting Linux kernel at 40100000 ...
3999 Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L
4000 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
4001 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB
4002 Load Address: 00000000
4003 Entry Point: 0000000c
4004 Verifying Checksum ... OK
4005 Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK
4006 ## Loading RAMDisk Image at 40200000 ...
4007 Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image
4008 Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed)
4009 Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553 kB = 0 MB
4010 Load Address: 00000000
4011 Entry Point: 00000000
4012 Verifying Checksum ... OK
4013 Loading Ramdisk ... OK
4014 Linux version 2.2.13 (wd@denx.local.net) (gcc version 2.95.2 19991024 (release)) #1 Wed Jul 19 02:32:08 MEST 2000
4015 Boot arguments: root=/dev/ram
4016 time_init: decrementer frequency = 187500000/60
4017 Calibrating delay loop... 49.77 BogoMIPS
4018 ...
4019 RAMDISK: Compressed image found at block 0
4020 VFS: Mounted root (ext2 filesystem).
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004021
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004022 bash#
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004023
Matthew McClintockefae4ca2006-06-28 10:41:37 -05004024Boot Linux and pass a flat device tree:
4025-----------
4026
4027First, U-Boot must be compiled with the appropriate defines. See the section
4028titled "Linux Kernel Interface" above for a more in depth explanation. The
4029following is an example of how to start a kernel and pass an updated
4030flat device tree:
4031
4032=> print oftaddr
4033oftaddr=0x300000
4034=> print oft
4035oft=oftrees/mpc8540ads.dtb
4036=> tftp $oftaddr $oft
4037Speed: 1000, full duplex
4038Using TSEC0 device
4039TFTP from server 192.168.1.1; our IP address is 192.168.1.101
4040Filename 'oftrees/mpc8540ads.dtb'.
4041Load address: 0x300000
4042Loading: #
4043done
4044Bytes transferred = 4106 (100a hex)
4045=> tftp $loadaddr $bootfile
4046Speed: 1000, full duplex
4047Using TSEC0 device
4048TFTP from server 192.168.1.1; our IP address is 192.168.1.2
4049Filename 'uImage'.
4050Load address: 0x200000
4051Loading:############
4052done
4053Bytes transferred = 1029407 (fb51f hex)
4054=> print loadaddr
4055loadaddr=200000
4056=> print oftaddr
4057oftaddr=0x300000
4058=> bootm $loadaddr - $oftaddr
4059## Booting image at 00200000 ...
Wolfgang Denk018147d2006-11-27 15:32:42 +01004060 Image Name: Linux-2.6.17-dirty
4061 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
4062 Data Size: 1029343 Bytes = 1005.2 kB
Matthew McClintockefae4ca2006-06-28 10:41:37 -05004063 Load Address: 00000000
Wolfgang Denk018147d2006-11-27 15:32:42 +01004064 Entry Point: 00000000
Matthew McClintockefae4ca2006-06-28 10:41:37 -05004065 Verifying Checksum ... OK
4066 Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK
4067Booting using flat device tree at 0x300000
4068Using MPC85xx ADS machine description
4069Memory CAM mapping: CAM0=256Mb, CAM1=256Mb, CAM2=0Mb residual: 0Mb
4070[snip]
4071
4072
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004073More About U-Boot Image Types:
4074------------------------------
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004075
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004076U-Boot supports the following image types:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004077
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004078 "Standalone Programs" are directly runnable in the environment
4079 provided by U-Boot; it is expected that (if they behave
4080 well) you can continue to work in U-Boot after return from
4081 the Standalone Program.
4082 "OS Kernel Images" are usually images of some Embedded OS which
4083 will take over control completely. Usually these programs
4084 will install their own set of exception handlers, device
4085 drivers, set up the MMU, etc. - this means, that you cannot
4086 expect to re-enter U-Boot except by resetting the CPU.
4087 "RAMDisk Images" are more or less just data blocks, and their
4088 parameters (address, size) are passed to an OS kernel that is
4089 being started.
4090 "Multi-File Images" contain several images, typically an OS
4091 (Linux) kernel image and one or more data images like
4092 RAMDisks. This construct is useful for instance when you want
4093 to boot over the network using BOOTP etc., where the boot
4094 server provides just a single image file, but you want to get
4095 for instance an OS kernel and a RAMDisk image.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004096
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004097 "Multi-File Images" start with a list of image sizes, each
4098 image size (in bytes) specified by an "uint32_t" in network
4099 byte order. This list is terminated by an "(uint32_t)0".
4100 Immediately after the terminating 0 follow the images, one by
4101 one, all aligned on "uint32_t" boundaries (size rounded up to
4102 a multiple of 4 bytes).
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004103
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004104 "Firmware Images" are binary images containing firmware (like
4105 U-Boot or FPGA images) which usually will be programmed to
4106 flash memory.
wdenk4fc95692003-02-28 00:49:47 +00004107
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004108 "Script files" are command sequences that will be executed by
4109 U-Boot's command interpreter; this feature is especially
4110 useful when you configure U-Boot to use a real shell (hush)
4111 as command interpreter.
wdenk4fc95692003-02-28 00:49:47 +00004112
Marek Vasutcf41a9b2012-03-14 21:52:45 +00004113Booting the Linux zImage:
4114-------------------------
4115
4116On some platforms, it's possible to boot Linux zImage. This is done
4117using the "bootz" command. The syntax of "bootz" command is the same
4118as the syntax of "bootm" command.
4119
Tom Rini45f46d12013-05-16 11:40:11 -04004120Note, defining the CONFIG_SUPPORT_RAW_INITRD allows user to supply
Marek Vasut28850d02012-03-18 11:47:58 +00004121kernel with raw initrd images. The syntax is slightly different, the
4122address of the initrd must be augmented by it's size, in the following
4123format: "<initrd addres>:<initrd size>".
4124
stroeseb9c17c52003-04-04 15:53:41 +00004125
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004126Standalone HOWTO:
4127=================
stroeseb9c17c52003-04-04 15:53:41 +00004128
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004129One of the features of U-Boot is that you can dynamically load and
4130run "standalone" applications, which can use some resources of
4131U-Boot like console I/O functions or interrupt services.
stroeseb9c17c52003-04-04 15:53:41 +00004132
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004133Two simple examples are included with the sources:
wdenk4fc95692003-02-28 00:49:47 +00004134
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004135"Hello World" Demo:
4136-------------------
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004137
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004138'examples/hello_world.c' contains a small "Hello World" Demo
4139application; it is automatically compiled when you build U-Boot.
4140It's configured to run at address 0x00040004, so you can play with it
4141like that:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004142
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004143 => loads
4144 ## Ready for S-Record download ...
4145 ~>examples/hello_world.srec
4146 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ...
4147 [file transfer complete]
4148 [connected]
4149 ## Start Addr = 0x00040004
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004150
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004151 => go 40004 Hello World! This is a test.
4152 ## Starting application at 0x00040004 ...
4153 Hello World
4154 argc = 7
4155 argv[0] = "40004"
4156 argv[1] = "Hello"
4157 argv[2] = "World!"
4158 argv[3] = "This"
4159 argv[4] = "is"
4160 argv[5] = "a"
4161 argv[6] = "test."
4162 argv[7] = "<NULL>"
4163 Hit any key to exit ...
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004164
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004165 ## Application terminated, rc = 0x0
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004166
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004167Another example, which demonstrates how to register a CPM interrupt
4168handler with the U-Boot code, can be found in 'examples/timer.c'.
4169Here, a CPM timer is set up to generate an interrupt every second.
4170The interrupt service routine is trivial, just printing a '.'
4171character, but this is just a demo program. The application can be
4172controlled by the following keys:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004173
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004174 ? - print current values og the CPM Timer registers
4175 b - enable interrupts and start timer
4176 e - stop timer and disable interrupts
4177 q - quit application
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004178
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004179 => loads
4180 ## Ready for S-Record download ...
4181 ~>examples/timer.srec
4182 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ...
4183 [file transfer complete]
4184 [connected]
4185 ## Start Addr = 0x00040004
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004186
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004187 => go 40004
4188 ## Starting application at 0x00040004 ...
4189 TIMERS=0xfff00980
4190 Using timer 1
4191 tgcr @ 0xfff00980, tmr @ 0xfff00990, trr @ 0xfff00994, tcr @ 0xfff00998, tcn @ 0xfff0099c, ter @ 0xfff009b0
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004192
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004193Hit 'b':
4194 [q, b, e, ?] Set interval 1000000 us
4195 Enabling timer
4196Hit '?':
4197 [q, b, e, ?] ........
4198 tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0xef6, ter=0x0
4199Hit '?':
4200 [q, b, e, ?] .
4201 tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x2ad4, ter=0x0
4202Hit '?':
4203 [q, b, e, ?] .
4204 tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x1efc, ter=0x0
4205Hit '?':
4206 [q, b, e, ?] .
4207 tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x169d, ter=0x0
4208Hit 'e':
4209 [q, b, e, ?] ...Stopping timer
4210Hit 'q':
4211 [q, b, e, ?] ## Application terminated, rc = 0x0
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004212
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004213
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004214Minicom warning:
4215================
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004216
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004217Over time, many people have reported problems when trying to use the
4218"minicom" terminal emulation program for serial download. I (wd)
4219consider minicom to be broken, and recommend not to use it. Under
4220Unix, I recommend to use C-Kermit for general purpose use (and
4221especially for kermit binary protocol download ("loadb" command), and
Karl O. Pinca0189bb2012-10-01 05:11:56 +00004222use "cu" for S-Record download ("loads" command). See
4223http://www.denx.de/wiki/view/DULG/SystemSetup#Section_4.3.
4224for help with kermit.
4225
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004226
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004227Nevertheless, if you absolutely want to use it try adding this
4228configuration to your "File transfer protocols" section:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004229
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004230 Name Program Name U/D FullScr IO-Red. Multi
4231 X kermit /usr/bin/kermit -i -l %l -s Y U Y N N
4232 Y kermit /usr/bin/kermit -i -l %l -r N D Y N N
wdenk8dba0502003-03-31 16:34:49 +00004233
wdenk8dba0502003-03-31 16:34:49 +00004234
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004235NetBSD Notes:
4236=============
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004237
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004238Starting at version 0.9.2, U-Boot supports NetBSD both as host
4239(build U-Boot) and target system (boots NetBSD/mpc8xx).
wdenk88e72a32003-06-19 23:04:19 +00004240
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004241Building requires a cross environment; it is known to work on
4242NetBSD/i386 with the cross-powerpc-netbsd-1.3 package (you will also
4243need gmake since the Makefiles are not compatible with BSD make).
4244Note that the cross-powerpc package does not install include files;
4245attempting to build U-Boot will fail because <machine/ansi.h> is
4246missing. This file has to be installed and patched manually:
wdenk88e72a32003-06-19 23:04:19 +00004247
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004248 # cd /usr/pkg/cross/powerpc-netbsd/include
4249 # mkdir powerpc
4250 # ln -s powerpc machine
4251 # cp /usr/src/sys/arch/powerpc/include/ansi.h powerpc/ansi.h
4252 # ${EDIT} powerpc/ansi.h ## must remove __va_list, _BSD_VA_LIST
wdenk88e72a32003-06-19 23:04:19 +00004253
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004254Native builds *don't* work due to incompatibilities between native
4255and U-Boot include files.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004256
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004257Booting assumes that (the first part of) the image booted is a
4258stage-2 loader which in turn loads and then invokes the kernel
4259proper. Loader sources will eventually appear in the NetBSD source
4260tree (probably in sys/arc/mpc8xx/stand/u-boot_stage2/); in the
wdenkd0245fc2005-04-13 10:02:42 +00004261meantime, see ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/ppcboot_stage2.tar.gz
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004262
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004263
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004264Implementation Internals:
4265=========================
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004266
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004267The following is not intended to be a complete description of every
4268implementation detail. However, it should help to understand the
4269inner workings of U-Boot and make it easier to port it to custom
4270hardware.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004271
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004272
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004273Initial Stack, Global Data:
4274---------------------------
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004275
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004276The implementation of U-Boot is complicated by the fact that U-Boot
4277starts running out of ROM (flash memory), usually without access to
4278system RAM (because the memory controller is not initialized yet).
4279This means that we don't have writable Data or BSS segments, and BSS
4280is not initialized as zero. To be able to get a C environment working
4281at all, we have to allocate at least a minimal stack. Implementation
4282options for this are defined and restricted by the CPU used: Some CPU
4283models provide on-chip memory (like the IMMR area on MPC8xx and
4284MPC826x processors), on others (parts of) the data cache can be
4285locked as (mis-) used as memory, etc.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004286
Wolfgang Denkb240aef2008-03-26 10:40:12 +01004287 Chris Hallinan posted a good summary of these issues to the
Wolfgang Denk290ae6b2008-12-30 22:56:11 +01004288 U-Boot mailing list:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004289
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004290 Subject: RE: [U-Boot-Users] RE: More On Memory Bank x (nothingness)?
4291 From: "Chris Hallinan" <clh@net1plus.com>
4292 Date: Mon, 10 Feb 2003 16:43:46 -0500 (22:43 MET)
4293 ...
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004294
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004295 Correct me if I'm wrong, folks, but the way I understand it
4296 is this: Using DCACHE as initial RAM for Stack, etc, does not
4297 require any physical RAM backing up the cache. The cleverness
4298 is that the cache is being used as a temporary supply of
4299 necessary storage before the SDRAM controller is setup. It's
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02004300 beyond the scope of this list to explain the details, but you
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004301 can see how this works by studying the cache architecture and
4302 operation in the architecture and processor-specific manuals.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004303
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004304 OCM is On Chip Memory, which I believe the 405GP has 4K. It
4305 is another option for the system designer to use as an
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02004306 initial stack/RAM area prior to SDRAM being available. Either
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004307 option should work for you. Using CS 4 should be fine if your
4308 board designers haven't used it for something that would
4309 cause you grief during the initial boot! It is frequently not
4310 used.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004311
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02004312 CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR should be somewhere that won't interfere
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004313 with your processor/board/system design. The default value
4314 you will find in any recent u-boot distribution in
Stefan Roese3e1f1b32005-08-01 16:49:12 +02004315 walnut.h should work for you. I'd set it to a value larger
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004316 than your SDRAM module. If you have a 64MB SDRAM module, set
4317 it above 400_0000. Just make sure your board has no resources
4318 that are supposed to respond to that address! That code in
4319 start.S has been around a while and should work as is when
4320 you get the config right.
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +00004321
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004322 -Chris Hallinan
4323 DS4.COM, Inc.
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +00004324
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004325It is essential to remember this, since it has some impact on the C
4326code for the initialization procedures:
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +00004327
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004328* Initialized global data (data segment) is read-only. Do not attempt
4329 to write it.
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +00004330
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -08004331* Do not use any uninitialized global data (or implicitly initialized
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004332 as zero data - BSS segment) at all - this is undefined, initiali-
4333 zation is performed later (when relocating to RAM).
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +00004334
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004335* Stack space is very limited. Avoid big data buffers or things like
4336 that.
wdenk4a5c8a72003-03-06 00:02:04 +00004337
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004338Having only the stack as writable memory limits means we cannot use
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -08004339normal global data to share information between the code. But it
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004340turned out that the implementation of U-Boot can be greatly
4341simplified by making a global data structure (gd_t) available to all
4342functions. We could pass a pointer to this data as argument to _all_
4343functions, but this would bloat the code. Instead we use a feature of
4344the GCC compiler (Global Register Variables) to share the data: we
4345place a pointer (gd) to the global data into a register which we
4346reserve for this purpose.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004347
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004348When choosing a register for such a purpose we are restricted by the
4349relevant (E)ABI specifications for the current architecture, and by
4350GCC's implementation.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004351
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004352For PowerPC, the following registers have specific use:
4353 R1: stack pointer
Wolfgang Denk69c09642008-02-14 22:43:22 +01004354 R2: reserved for system use
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004355 R3-R4: parameter passing and return values
4356 R5-R10: parameter passing
4357 R13: small data area pointer
4358 R30: GOT pointer
4359 R31: frame pointer
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004360
Joakim Tjernlund693c0c12010-01-19 14:41:58 +01004361 (U-Boot also uses R12 as internal GOT pointer. r12
4362 is a volatile register so r12 needs to be reset when
4363 going back and forth between asm and C)
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004364
Wolfgang Denk69c09642008-02-14 22:43:22 +01004365 ==> U-Boot will use R2 to hold a pointer to the global data
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004366
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004367 Note: on PPC, we could use a static initializer (since the
4368 address of the global data structure is known at compile time),
4369 but it turned out that reserving a register results in somewhat
4370 smaller code - although the code savings are not that big (on
4371 average for all boards 752 bytes for the whole U-Boot image,
4372 624 text + 127 data).
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004373
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004374On ARM, the following registers are used:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004375
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004376 R0: function argument word/integer result
4377 R1-R3: function argument word
Jeroen Hofsteea556aca2013-09-21 14:04:42 +02004378 R9: platform specific
4379 R10: stack limit (used only if stack checking is enabled)
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004380 R11: argument (frame) pointer
4381 R12: temporary workspace
4382 R13: stack pointer
4383 R14: link register
4384 R15: program counter
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004385
Jeroen Hofsteea556aca2013-09-21 14:04:42 +02004386 ==> U-Boot will use R9 to hold a pointer to the global data
4387
4388 Note: on ARM, only R_ARM_RELATIVE relocations are supported.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004389
Thomas Chou8fa38582010-05-21 11:08:03 +08004390On Nios II, the ABI is documented here:
4391 http://www.altera.com/literature/hb/nios2/n2cpu_nii51016.pdf
4392
4393 ==> U-Boot will use gp to hold a pointer to the global data
4394
4395 Note: on Nios II, we give "-G0" option to gcc and don't use gp
4396 to access small data sections, so gp is free.
4397
Macpaul Lin1cac36e2011-10-19 20:41:11 +00004398On NDS32, the following registers are used:
4399
4400 R0-R1: argument/return
4401 R2-R5: argument
4402 R15: temporary register for assembler
4403 R16: trampoline register
4404 R28: frame pointer (FP)
4405 R29: global pointer (GP)
4406 R30: link register (LP)
4407 R31: stack pointer (SP)
4408 PC: program counter (PC)
4409
4410 ==> U-Boot will use R10 to hold a pointer to the global data
4411
Wolfgang Denk6405a152006-03-31 18:32:53 +02004412NOTE: DECLARE_GLOBAL_DATA_PTR must be used with file-global scope,
4413or current versions of GCC may "optimize" the code too much.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004414
Rick Chend7e6f922017-12-26 13:55:59 +08004415On RISC-V, the following registers are used:
4416
4417 x0: hard-wired zero (zero)
4418 x1: return address (ra)
4419 x2: stack pointer (sp)
4420 x3: global pointer (gp)
4421 x4: thread pointer (tp)
4422 x5: link register (t0)
4423 x8: frame pointer (fp)
4424 x10-x11: arguments/return values (a0-1)
4425 x12-x17: arguments (a2-7)
4426 x28-31: temporaries (t3-6)
4427 pc: program counter (pc)
4428
4429 ==> U-Boot will use gp to hold a pointer to the global data
4430
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004431Memory Management:
4432------------------
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004433
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004434U-Boot runs in system state and uses physical addresses, i.e. the
4435MMU is not used either for address mapping nor for memory protection.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004436
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004437The available memory is mapped to fixed addresses using the memory
4438controller. In this process, a contiguous block is formed for each
4439memory type (Flash, SDRAM, SRAM), even when it consists of several
4440physical memory banks.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004441
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004442U-Boot is installed in the first 128 kB of the first Flash bank (on
4443TQM8xxL modules this is the range 0x40000000 ... 0x4001FFFF). After
4444booting and sizing and initializing DRAM, the code relocates itself
4445to the upper end of DRAM. Immediately below the U-Boot code some
Jean-Christophe PLAGNIOL-VILLARD03836942008-10-16 15:01:15 +02004446memory is reserved for use by malloc() [see CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004447configuration setting]. Below that, a structure with global Board
4448Info data is placed, followed by the stack (growing downward).
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004449
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004450Additionally, some exception handler code is copied to the low 8 kB
4451of DRAM (0x00000000 ... 0x00001FFF).
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004452
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004453So a typical memory configuration with 16 MB of DRAM could look like
4454this:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004455
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004456 0x0000 0000 Exception Vector code
4457 :
4458 0x0000 1FFF
4459 0x0000 2000 Free for Application Use
4460 :
4461 :
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004462
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004463 :
4464 :
4465 0x00FB FF20 Monitor Stack (Growing downward)
4466 0x00FB FFAC Board Info Data and permanent copy of global data
4467 0x00FC 0000 Malloc Arena
4468 :
4469 0x00FD FFFF
4470 0x00FE 0000 RAM Copy of Monitor Code
4471 ... eventually: LCD or video framebuffer
4472 ... eventually: pRAM (Protected RAM - unchanged by reset)
4473 0x00FF FFFF [End of RAM]
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004474
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004475
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004476System Initialization:
4477----------------------
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004478
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004479In the reset configuration, U-Boot starts at the reset entry point
Marcel Ziswilerabd8dcb2008-07-09 08:17:15 +02004480(on most PowerPC systems at address 0x00000100). Because of the reset
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -08004481configuration for CS0# this is a mirror of the on board Flash memory.
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004482To be able to re-map memory U-Boot then jumps to its link address.
4483To be able to implement the initialization code in C, a (small!)
4484initial stack is set up in the internal Dual Ported RAM (in case CPUs
Heiko Schocher71cb3e92017-06-07 17:33:10 +02004485which provide such a feature like), or in a locked part of the data
4486cache. After that, U-Boot initializes the CPU core, the caches and
4487the SIU.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004488
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004489Next, all (potentially) available memory banks are mapped using a
4490preliminary mapping. For example, we put them on 512 MB boundaries
4491(multiples of 0x20000000: SDRAM on 0x00000000 and 0x20000000, Flash
4492on 0x40000000 and 0x60000000, SRAM on 0x80000000). Then UPM A is
4493programmed for SDRAM access. Using the temporary configuration, a
4494simple memory test is run that determines the size of the SDRAM
4495banks.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004496
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004497When there is more than one SDRAM bank, and the banks are of
4498different size, the largest is mapped first. For equal size, the first
4499bank (CS2#) is mapped first. The first mapping is always for address
45000x00000000, with any additional banks following immediately to create
4501contiguous memory starting from 0.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004502
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004503Then, the monitor installs itself at the upper end of the SDRAM area
4504and allocates memory for use by malloc() and for the global Board
4505Info data; also, the exception vector code is copied to the low RAM
4506pages, and the final stack is set up.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004507
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004508Only after this relocation will you have a "normal" C environment;
4509until that you are restricted in several ways, mostly because you are
4510running from ROM, and because the code will have to be relocated to a
4511new address in RAM.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004512
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004513
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004514U-Boot Porting Guide:
4515----------------------
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004516
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004517[Based on messages by Jerry Van Baren in the U-Boot-Users mailing
4518list, October 2002]
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004519
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004520
Jerry Van Barenba0687c2009-07-15 20:42:59 -04004521int main(int argc, char *argv[])
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004522{
4523 sighandler_t no_more_time;
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004524
Jerry Van Barenba0687c2009-07-15 20:42:59 -04004525 signal(SIGALRM, no_more_time);
4526 alarm(PROJECT_DEADLINE - toSec (3 * WEEK));
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004527
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004528 if (available_money > available_manpower) {
Jerry Van Barenba0687c2009-07-15 20:42:59 -04004529 Pay consultant to port U-Boot;
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004530 return 0;
4531 }
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004532
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004533 Download latest U-Boot source;
wdenk34b613e2002-12-17 01:51:00 +00004534
Wolfgang Denk290ae6b2008-12-30 22:56:11 +01004535 Subscribe to u-boot mailing list;
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004536
Jerry Van Barenba0687c2009-07-15 20:42:59 -04004537 if (clueless)
4538 email("Hi, I am new to U-Boot, how do I get started?");
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004539
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004540 while (learning) {
4541 Read the README file in the top level directory;
Jerry Van Barenba0687c2009-07-15 20:42:59 -04004542 Read http://www.denx.de/twiki/bin/view/DULG/Manual;
Patrick Delaunay9b281fa2020-02-28 15:18:10 +01004543 Read applicable doc/README.*;
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004544 Read the source, Luke;
Jerry Van Barenba0687c2009-07-15 20:42:59 -04004545 /* find . -name "*.[chS]" | xargs grep -i <keyword> */
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004546 }
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004547
Jerry Van Barenba0687c2009-07-15 20:42:59 -04004548 if (available_money > toLocalCurrency ($2500))
4549 Buy a BDI3000;
4550 else
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004551 Add a lot of aggravation and time;
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004552
Jerry Van Barenba0687c2009-07-15 20:42:59 -04004553 if (a similar board exists) { /* hopefully... */
4554 cp -a board/<similar> board/<myboard>
4555 cp include/configs/<similar>.h include/configs/<myboard>.h
4556 } else {
4557 Create your own board support subdirectory;
4558 Create your own board include/configs/<myboard>.h file;
4559 }
4560 Edit new board/<myboard> files
4561 Edit new include/configs/<myboard>.h
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004562
Jerry Van Barenba0687c2009-07-15 20:42:59 -04004563 while (!accepted) {
4564 while (!running) {
4565 do {
4566 Add / modify source code;
4567 } until (compiles);
4568 Debug;
4569 if (clueless)
4570 email("Hi, I am having problems...");
4571 }
4572 Send patch file to the U-Boot email list;
4573 if (reasonable critiques)
4574 Incorporate improvements from email list code review;
4575 else
4576 Defend code as written;
wdenk634d2f72004-04-15 23:14:49 +00004577 }
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004578
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004579 return 0;
4580}
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004581
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004582void no_more_time (int sig)
4583{
4584 hire_a_guru();
4585}
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004586
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004587
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004588Coding Standards:
4589-----------------
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004590
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004591All contributions to U-Boot should conform to the Linux kernel
Baruch Siachb1081252017-12-10 17:34:35 +02004592coding style; see the kernel coding style guide at
4593https://www.kernel.org/doc/html/latest/process/coding-style.html, and the
4594script "scripts/Lindent" in your Linux kernel source directory.
Detlev Zundelaa63d482006-09-01 15:39:02 +02004595
4596Source files originating from a different project (for example the
4597MTD subsystem) are generally exempt from these guidelines and are not
Jeremiah Mahler03f930c2015-01-04 18:56:50 -08004598reformatted to ease subsequent migration to newer versions of those
Detlev Zundelaa63d482006-09-01 15:39:02 +02004599sources.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004600
Detlev Zundelaa63d482006-09-01 15:39:02 +02004601Please note that U-Boot is implemented in C (and to some small parts in
4602Assembler); no C++ is used, so please do not use C++ style comments (//)
4603in your code.
wdenkad276f22004-01-04 16:28:35 +00004604
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004605Please also stick to the following formatting rules:
4606- remove any trailing white space
Wolfgang Denk20bd2a62011-07-27 10:59:55 +00004607- use TAB characters for indentation and vertical alignment, not spaces
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004608- make sure NOT to use DOS '\r\n' line feeds
Wolfgang Denk20bd2a62011-07-27 10:59:55 +00004609- do not add more than 2 consecutive empty lines to source files
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004610- do not add trailing empty lines to source files
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004611
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004612Submissions which do not conform to the standards may be returned
4613with a request to reformat the changes.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004614
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004615
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004616Submitting Patches:
4617-------------------
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004618
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004619Since the number of patches for U-Boot is growing, we need to
4620establish some rules. Submissions which do not conform to these rules
4621may be rejected, even when they contain important and valuable stuff.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004622
Magnus Liljaf3b287b2008-08-06 19:32:33 +02004623Please see http://www.denx.de/wiki/U-Boot/Patches for details.
Wolfgang Denkb240aef2008-03-26 10:40:12 +01004624
Wolfgang Denk290ae6b2008-12-30 22:56:11 +01004625Patches shall be sent to the u-boot mailing list <u-boot@lists.denx.de>;
S. Lockwood-Childsda6d34c2017-11-14 22:56:42 -08004626see https://lists.denx.de/listinfo/u-boot
Wolfgang Denk290ae6b2008-12-30 22:56:11 +01004627
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004628When you send a patch, please include the following information with
4629it:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004630
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004631* For bug fixes: a description of the bug and how your patch fixes
4632 this bug. Please try to include a way of demonstrating that the
4633 patch actually fixes something.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004634
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004635* For new features: a description of the feature and your
4636 implementation.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004637
Robert P. J. Day076ed9b2015-12-19 07:16:10 -05004638* For major contributions, add a MAINTAINERS file with your
4639 information and associated file and directory references.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004640
Albert ARIBAUD48e910f2013-09-11 15:52:51 +02004641* When you add support for a new board, don't forget to add a
4642 maintainer e-mail address to the boards.cfg file, too.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004643
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004644* If your patch adds new configuration options, don't forget to
4645 document these in the README file.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004646
Wolfgang Denkb240aef2008-03-26 10:40:12 +01004647* The patch itself. If you are using git (which is *strongly*
4648 recommended) you can easily generate the patch using the
Wolfgang Denk20bd2a62011-07-27 10:59:55 +00004649 "git format-patch". If you then use "git send-email" to send it to
Wolfgang Denkb240aef2008-03-26 10:40:12 +01004650 the U-Boot mailing list, you will avoid most of the common problems
4651 with some other mail clients.
wdenkca9bc762003-07-15 07:45:49 +00004652
Wolfgang Denkb240aef2008-03-26 10:40:12 +01004653 If you cannot use git, use "diff -purN OLD NEW". If your version of
4654 diff does not support these options, then get the latest version of
4655 GNU diff.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004656
Wolfgang Denkb240aef2008-03-26 10:40:12 +01004657 The current directory when running this command shall be the parent
4658 directory of the U-Boot source tree (i. e. please make sure that
4659 your patch includes sufficient directory information for the
4660 affected files).
4661
4662 We prefer patches as plain text. MIME attachments are discouraged,
4663 and compressed attachments must not be used.
wdenk88e72a32003-06-19 23:04:19 +00004664
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004665* If one logical set of modifications affects or creates several
4666 files, all these changes shall be submitted in a SINGLE patch file.
wdenk57b2d802003-06-27 21:31:46 +00004667
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004668* Changesets that contain different, unrelated modifications shall be
4669 submitted as SEPARATE patches, one patch per changeset.
wdenk88e72a32003-06-19 23:04:19 +00004670
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004671
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004672Notes:
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004673
Simon Glassdc27def2016-07-27 20:33:08 -06004674* Before sending the patch, run the buildman script on your patched
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004675 source tree and make sure that no errors or warnings are reported
4676 for any of the boards.
4677
4678* Keep your modifications to the necessary minimum: A patch
4679 containing several unrelated changes or arbitrary reformats will be
4680 returned with a request to re-formatting / split it.
wdenkc6097192002-11-03 00:24:07 +00004681
wdenk6c59edc2004-05-03 20:45:30 +00004682* If you modify existing code, make sure that your new code does not
4683 add to the memory footprint of the code ;-) Small is beautiful!
4684 When adding new features, these should compile conditionally only
4685 (using #ifdef), and the resulting code with the new feature
4686 disabled must not need more memory than the old code without your
4687 modification.
wdenkcbc49a52005-05-03 14:12:25 +00004688
Wolfgang Denk290ae6b2008-12-30 22:56:11 +01004689* Remember that there is a size limit of 100 kB per message on the
4690 u-boot mailing list. Bigger patches will be moderated. If they are
4691 reasonable and not too big, they will be acknowledged. But patches
4692 bigger than the size limit should be avoided.